Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2012 PDF
en
Summary of Content for Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2012 PDF
VOLVO C70
Owners Manual Web Edition
DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte- nance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00 00 Introduction
Important information................................. 8 Volvo and the environment....................... 12
01 01 Safety
Seatbelts................................................... 16 Airbag system........................................... 19 Airbags...................................................... 20 Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22 Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 24 Inflatable Curtain (DMIC)........................... 26 WHIPS....................................................... 27 Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)........ 29 When the systems deploy......................... 30 Crash mode.............................................. 32 Child safety............................................... 33 02
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars.................. 44 Overview, right-hand drive cars................ 46 Driver's door control panel....................... 48 Combined instrument panel...................... 49 Indicator and warning symbols................. 50 Information display................................... 54 Electrical socket........................................ 56 Lighting panel........................................... 57 Left-hand stalk switch............................... 61 Right-hand stalk switch............................ 64 Cruise control*.......................................... 66 Keypad in the steering wheel*.................. 68 Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warn- ing flashers................................................ 69 Parking brake............................................ 70 Power windows......................................... 71 Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 73 Personal preferences................................ 77
HomeLink *.............................................. 80
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3
03 03 Climate control
General information on climate control..... 86 Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 88 Air distribution........................................... 91 Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- senger compartment heater*.................... 92 Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)......... 95
04 04 Interior
Front seats................................................ 98 Electrically operated roof ....................... 103 Wind deflector*....................................... 106 Interior lighting........................................ 107 Storage spaces in the passenger com- partment.................................................. 110 Cargo area.............................................. 114
05 05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade......... 120 Active locks............................................. 123 Privacy locking*....................................... 124 Keyless drive*.......................................... 126 Battery in remote control key.................. 129 Locking and unlocking............................ 130 Alarm*..................................................... 134
Table of contents
4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 06 Starting and driving
General.................................................... 140 Refuelling................................................ 142 Alcolock*................................................. 146 Starting the engine.................................. 150 Keyless drive*.......................................... 152 Manual gearbox...................................... 153 Automatic gearbox.................................. 154 Brake system.......................................... 157 DSTC Stability and traction control sys- tem*......................................................... 159 Park Assist*............................................. 161 BLIS* Blind Spot Information System. . 163 Towing and recovery.............................. 166 Start assistance...................................... 169 Driving with a trailer................................ 170 Towing equipment*................................. 172 Detachable towbar* ............................... 174 Loading................................................... 178 Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 179
07 07 Wheels and tyres
General.................................................... 182 Tyre pressure.......................................... 186 Warning triangle* and spare wheel * ...... 187 Changing wheels.................................... 190 Emergency puncture repair*................... 192
08 08 Car care
Cleaning.................................................. 198 Touching up paintwork........................... 202 Rustproofing........................................... 203
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5
09 09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service........................................... 206 Self-maintenance.................................... 207 Bonnet and engine compartment........... 208 Oils and fluids......................................... 210 Wiper blades........................................... 216 Battery..................................................... 217 Replacing bulbs...................................... 219 Fuses...................................................... 225 10
10 Infotainment system
General.................................................... 234 Audio functions....................................... 236 Radio functions....................................... 241 CD functions........................................... 246 Menu structure audio system.............. 249 Phone functions*..................................... 250 Menu structure phone*......................... 257 Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 260 11
11 Specifications
Type designation..................................... 268 Dimensions and weights......................... 270 Engine specifications.............................. 273 Engine oil................................................ 274 Fluids and lubricants............................... 276 Fuel......................................................... 278 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres- sure ........................................................ 280 Electrical system..................................... 281 Type approval......................................... 283 Symbols in the display............................ 284
Table of contents
6
12 12 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 288
Table of contents
7
Introduction
Important information
8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey. This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions, to see how best to handle the car in different sit- uations, and to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illus- trations in this owner's manual are not binding. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice. Volvo Car Corporation
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual also describes options (factory fitted equip- ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's man- ual is not available in all cars - they have dif- ferent equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text messages. These text messages are high-
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and mes- sage texts on the information display (e.g. AUDIO SETTINGS).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
9
warning is ignored, may result in serious per- sonal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G 03 15 92
White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.
Information
G 03 15 93
White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres- ponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters adja- cent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a move- ment.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com- ponents are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in con- nection with the illustration that describes the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Introduction
Important information
10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Coolant
Engine oil
To be continued
This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the following page.
Recording data
Your vehicle contains a number of computers whose function is to continuously check and monitor the vehicle's operation and function- ality. Some of the computers can record infor- mation during normal driving if they detect an error. In addition, information is recorded in the event of a crash or incident. Parts of the recor- ded information are required so that techni- cians can diagnose and rectify faults in the vehicle during servicing and maintenance and so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and other regulations. In addition to this, the infor- mation is used for research purposes by Volvo in order to continually develop quality and safety, as the information can contribute to a better understanding of the factors that cause accidents and injuries. The information includes details of the status and functionality of various systems and modules in the vehicle with regard to engine, throttle, steering and brake systems, amongst other things. This information may include details regarding the
way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi- cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use, steering wheel movement and whether or not the driver and passengers have used their seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa- tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers for a certain length of time, but also as a result of a collision or incident. This information may be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to further develop and further enhance safety and quality and as long as there are legal require- ments and other regulations that Volvo needs to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri- bed information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. However, due to national legislation and regulations Volvo may be required to disclose such infor- mation to authorities such as police authorities, or others who may assert a legal right to have access to it.
To be able to read and interpret the information recorded by the computers in the vehicle requires special technical equipment that Volvo, and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and main- tenance, is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling complies with
applicable legal requirements. For further infor- mation - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of accessories can negatively affect the car's electrical system. Certain accessories only function when their associated software is installed in the car's computer system. We therefore recommend that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories which are connected to or affect the electrical system.
Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call *
Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that consists of safety, security and comfort serv- ices. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a change of owner, it is very important that these services are discontinued so that the former owner cannot access the services in the car. Contact the call centre by pressing the ON
CALL button in the car or contact an author- ised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing the security code" in the owner's manual for Volvo On Call.
Introduction
Important information
11
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- mation concerning your car.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
G 00 00 00
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- ration's core values which influence all opera- tions. We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manufac- tured in one of the cleanest and most resource- efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo- ration has global ISO certification, which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units. We also set requirements for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emis- sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con- sumption. For more information read under the heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the con- cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com- partment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte- rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom- ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out- side.
The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- tored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 13
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- sant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. Extreme attention has been given to choosing environmentally-compatible materials.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and mainte- nance of your car it becomes part of our sys- tem. We make clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental impact - here are a few tips:
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
Drive economically - think ahead.
Perform service and maintenance in accordance with the owner's manual's instructions - follow the Service and War- ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
If the car is equipped with an engine block heater*, use it before starting from cold - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine rea- ches normal operating temperature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.
High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resistance - a doubling of speed increases wind resis- tance 4 times.
Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Following this advice can save money, the planet's resources are saved, and the car's durability is extended. For more information and further advice, see the pages 140 and 278.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is important that the car is recycled in an envi- ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
The owner's manual and the environment
The Forest Stewardship Council symbol shows that the paper pulp in this publication comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources.
14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seatbelts................................................................................................. 16 Airbag system......................................................................................... 19 Airbags.................................................................................................... 20 Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22 Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 24 Inflatable Curtain (DMIC)......................................................................... 26 WHIPS..................................................................................................... 27 Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)...................................................... 29 When the systems deploy....................................................................... 30 Crash mode............................................................................................ 32 Child safety............................................................................................. 33
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
16
General information
G 02 01 04
Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi- tioned low down.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all passengers use their seatbelts. It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud "click" indicates that the seatbelt has locked.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red lock button and then let the seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-
drawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Keep in mind the following
do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything
the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen)
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or dam- age. The new seatbelt must be type- approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
WARNING
The rear seat is designed for a maximum of two passengers.
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
17
Seatbelts and pregnancy
G 02 01 05
The seatbelt should always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way. The diagonal section of the seat- belt should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section of the seatbelt should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). They should strive to posi- tion the seat with as large a distance as possi- ble between their abdomen and the steering wheel.
Seatbelt reminder
G 02 96 52
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual reminder. The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time depend- ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. A message is shown in the information display when the seatbelts are used. The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after press- ing the indicator stalk's READ button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during a journey. This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning ceases when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when acknowledged manually by pressing the READ button.
The message on the information display show- ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail- able. Press the READ button to see stored messages.
Certain markets
An audio signal and indicator lamp remind the driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds.
01 Safety
Seatbelts 01
18
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten- sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for occu- pants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not func- tion as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
Seatbelt guide
G 02 01 06
The seatbelt guide is fitted on both the driver's seat and passenger seat.
The seatbelt guide is an aid for providing better access to the seatbelt. When getting into and out of the rear seat, remove the seatbelt from the seatbelt guide and position it furthest back on the seatbelt bar. Refit the seatbelt into the seatbelt guide afterwards.
01 Safety
Airbag system 01
19
Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel
The warning symbol in the combined instru- ment panel illuminates when the remote con- trol key is turned to key position I, II or III. The symbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds pro- vided the airbag system is fault-free.
As well as the warning symbol, a message may appear on the dis- play in appropriate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and the message SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE REQUIRED or SRS
AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT
appears in the display. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, SRS or the IC system. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
01 Safety
Airbags 01
20
Airbag system
G 02 01 11
SRS system, left-hand drive
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when compressed. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely nor- mal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, takes place within tenths of a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.
G 02 01 10
SRS system, right-hand drive
NOTE
The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver's side and passenger side are used.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- ingly so that one or more airbags is deployed.
The capacities of the airbags are also adap- ted to the collision force to which they are subjected.
01 Safety
Airbags 01
21
G 02 01 13
Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive and right-hand drive cars.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the instrument panel where the passenger air- bag is located.
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's side. It is folded up into the centre of the steer- ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked SRS
AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
Passenger airbag
The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen- ger side. It is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. The cover panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and back against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated.1
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Children under 140 cm must never sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For information on how to activate/deactivate, see under the heading Activating/deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instru- ment panel and is accessible when the pas- senger door is open, (see under the heading below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required posi- tion. Volvo recommends that the key blade is used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see page 121.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a switch (PACOS), then the airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the text message in the roof console indicates that the airbag is deacti- vated, and if the warning symbol for the air- bag system is also displayed on the com- bined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
Activating/deactivating
Switch location
The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, children taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat, but never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
Messages
G 01 83 46
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof con- sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas- senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus- tration).
G 01 83 44
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indicates that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).
NOTE
When the remote control key is turned to key position II or III the warning symbol for the airbag is displayed on the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, see page 19.
Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag. For more information about the different key positions, see page 150.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
24
Side airbag
G 02 01 18
Side airbag locations.
In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil- lars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- er's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and are an important part of the SIPS. The side airbags are located in the front seat backrests.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Do not place any objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.
Side airbags are a supplement the seat- belts. Always use a seatbelt.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated1 passenger air- bag.
Location
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01
25
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (DMIC) 01
26
Properties
G 02 54 24
The inflatable curtain, DMIC (Door Mounted Inflatable Curtain), is a supplement to the SIPS system. It is fitted along the inside of the driv- er's and passenger doors and protects both front seat occupants. The inflatable curtain is activated by sensors in the event of a suffi- ciently violent collision or if the car is at risk of overturning. When deployed, the inflatable cur- tain inflates. The inflatable curtain helps to pre- vent the driver and front seat passenger from striking their heads on the inside of the car dur- ing a collision. The inflatable curtain is deployed irrespective of whether the roof is open or closed.
G 02 54 25
WARNING
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for place- ment in these areas.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
WARNING
There is a risk of personal injury if the driver or passenger is leaning against the door panel when the inflatable curtain deploys. This could also compromise the intended protection.
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
27
Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS
G 02 03 47
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe- cially designed head restraints for the front seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the col- lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.
01 Safety
WHIPS 01
28
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
G 02 01 25
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end collision.
01 Safety
Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) 01
29
ROPS function
G 02 07 97
Roll bars in raised position.
The ROPS system consists of strong roll bars which are located behind the passengers' head restraints, as well as sensors. In the event of a situation where the car is at risk of over- turning, or in the event of a sufficiently violent collision from behind, the sensors detect this and the roll bars rise up behind the passengers' heads. The roll bars are deployed irrespective of whether the roof is open or closed.
Volvo recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the ROPS system has deployed.
WARNING
Do not carry out any work on the ROPS sys- tem.
Do not place any objects on the ROPS sys- tem or behind the passengers' head restraints.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy 01
30
Activating the systems
System Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner, front seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision and/or overturning.
Seatbelt tensioner, rear seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or overturning.
Airbags In a frontal collisionA
Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accidentA
Inflatable Curtain DMIC In a side-impact accident and/or overturningA
Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision.
Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) In the event of overturning and/or collision from behind.
A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have been deployed, the follow- ing is recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbag, SIPS, DMIC, belt tensioner and ROPS systems are deployed only once dur- ing a collision.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liq- uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo rec- ommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy 01
31
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Crash mode 01
32
Driving after a collision
G 02 90 42
If the car is involved in a collision, the text CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear on the information display. This means that the car has reduced functionality. Crash mode is a protective state that is enforced when the col- lision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.
Firstly, remove the remote control key and then reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car. If CRASH MODE SEE
MANUAL is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once mov- ing.
Moving the car
If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH
MODE SEE MANUAL has been reset, the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position. Do not move the car further than nec- essary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in crash mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you always engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to NORMAL MODE after CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has been displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message is displayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in crash mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
33
Children should sit comfortably and safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- facing child seats until as late an age as pos- sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then front-facing booster cushions/child seats until up to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size, for more information, see page 35.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for your particular car. Using Vol- vo's child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Child seats
G 02 01 28
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included with the product.
Do not attach the straps for the child seat to the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam- age the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.
Location of child seats
You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat, provided the passenger airbag is not activated1.
one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. A child in the front passenger seat could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
34
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated2.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.
Label Airbag
Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel on the passenger side, see the illustration on page 22.
2 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
35
Recommended child seats3
Weight Front seatA Rear seat
Group 0
max. 10 kg
Group 0+
max. 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(L)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
3 With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
36
Weight Front seatA Rear seat
Group 1
9 18 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.B
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.B
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.B
Type approval: E5 03171
(L)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
01 Safety
Child safety 01
37
Weight Front seatA Rear seat
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and strapsB
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
01 Safety
Child safety 01
38
Weight Front seatA Rear seat
Group 2/3
15 36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
A For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22. B To install a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer to have the mounting points installed.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated4.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
4 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
39
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
G 02 07 98
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see illustration above).
Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, there is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct child seat (see the following table).
Size class
Description
A Full size, front-facing child seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front- facing child seat
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front- facing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child seat
D Reduced size, rear-facing child seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
Size class
Description
F Transverse infant seat, left- hand
G Transverse infant seat, right- hand
WARNING
Never place a child in the passenger seat if the car is equipped with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- cation then the car model must be included on the child seat's vehicle list.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda- tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
01 Safety
Child safety 01
40
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg E X OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg E X OK
(IL)
D X OKA
(IL)
C X OKA
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OKA
(IL)
C X OKA
(IL)
01 Safety
Child safety 01
41
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKB
(IUF)
B1 X OKB
(IUF)
A X OKB
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A In order to be able to fit the infant/child seat in the rear seat, the front passenger seat has been adjusted to a location in front of centre position. B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
42 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Overview, left-hand drive cars................................................................ 44 Overview, right-hand drive cars.............................................................. 46 Driver's door control panel..................................................................... 48 Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 49 Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 50 Information display.................................................................................. 54 Electrical socket...................................................................................... 56 Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 57 Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 61 Right-hand stalk switch.......................................................................... 64 Cruise control*........................................................................................ 66 Keypad in the steering wheel*................................................................ 68 Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers............................. 69 Parking brake.......................................................................................... 70 Power windows....................................................................................... 71 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 73 Personal preferences.............................................................................. 77
HomeLink *............................................................................................ 80
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
02
44
268151210 11 13 14 8 23 24 25
27
30
31
29
3
28
8
7
32
34
33
9
7
6
8
9
16
17
18 22
20
21
19
3
2
1
5
4
G 02
82 06
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
02
45
Steering wheel adjustment
Opening handle, bonnet
Control panel, windows and door mirrors
Direction indicators, main beam, trip com- puter
Lighting panel and fuel filler flap opener
Door handle and lock button.
Indicator lamp, locking
Air vents, dashboard
Air vent for side window
Cruise control
Horn and airbags
Combined instrument panel
Keypad for infotainment system
Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp washers
Ignition switch
Rearview mirror, interior
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air- bag indicator
Switch, interior lighting, left-hand side
Switch, optional equipment
Switch, passenger compartment auto- matic lighting
Switch, optional equipment
Switch, passenger compartment lighting, right-hand side
Display, car settings/audio system etc.
Controls, car settings/audio system etc.
Climate control
Indicator lamp, hazard warning flashers
Door handle and lock button
Glovebox
Gear lever (manual)/gear selector (auto- matic)
Electrical socket and cigarette lighter
Switch, roof control
Parking brake
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
Switch, optional equipment
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
02
46
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
02
47
Electrical socket and cigarette lighter
Switch, roof control
Parking brake
Control panel, windows and door mirrors
Glovebox
Door handle and lock button
Indicator lamp, locking
Air vent for side window
Air vents in dashboard
Climate control
Controls, car settings/audio system etc.
Display, car settings/audio system etc.
Switch, interior lighting, left-hand side
Switch, optional equipment
Switch, passenger compartment auto- matic lighting
Switch, optional equipment
Switch, passenger compartment lighting, right-hand side
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air- bag indicator
Rearview mirror, interior
Ignition switch
Stalk switch, left
Keypad, steering wheel, left
Combined instrument panel
Horn and airbags
Keypad, steering wheel, right
Indicator lamp, hazard warning flashers
Door handle and lock button
Lighting panel and fuel filler flap opener
Stalk switch, right
Opening handle, bonnet
Lever, steering wheel adjustment
Gear lever (manual)/gear selector (auto- matic)
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
Switch, optional equipment
02 Instruments and controls
Driver's door control panel
02
48
Driver's door control panel
Power windows, all windows down/up
Power windows
Door mirror, left-hand side
Door mirrors, setting
Door mirror, right-hand side
02 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
02
49
Speedometer.
Direction indicators, left.
Warning symbol.
Information display Shows information or warning messages, outside temperature and clock. When the outside temperature is between +2 C to -5 C a snowflake illu- minates on the display. This warns of icy roads. The outside temperature gauge may show a slightly high reading after the car has been stationary.
Information symbol.
Direction indicator, right.
Tachometer Indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Indicator and warning symbols.
Fuel gauge, see also trip computer, pag e 62.
Main beam indicator.
Display Display for automatic gear posi- tion, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter and cruise control.
Button for trip meter Used to measure short distances. Short presses on the but- ton switches between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 sec- onds) resets an active trip meter to zero.
Temperature gauge - Used for the engine cooling system. A message will appear on the display if the temperature becomes too high and the gauge goes into the red zone. Bear in mind that extra lights placed in front of the air intake, for example, reduce the cooling capacity at high outside tempera- tures and high engine loads.
Indicator and warning symbols.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
50
Functionality check, symbols
All indicator and warning symbols1 illuminate when the remote control key is turned to posi- tion II before starting. This is to check that the symbols are working. When the engine starts, all the symbols should go out except the park- ing brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start within five seconds, all symbols extin- guish except the symbols for a fault in the car's emissions system and for low oil pressure. Certain symbols may have no function, depending on the car's specifica- tions.
Symbols in the centre of the instrument panel
G 03 07 55
The red warning symbol illumi- nates when a fault has been indi- cated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the
information display at the same time. The sym- bol remains visible until the fault has been rec- tified but the text message can be cleared with the READ button, see page 54. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
When the symbol illuminates:
1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the car further.
2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accord- ance with the message in the display. Clear the message using READ.
The yellow information symbol illu- minates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared using the READ but- ton, see page 54, or disappears
automatically after a period of time (time depending on which function is indicated).
The yellow information symbol can also illumi- nate in conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the READ button, or disappear automatically after a time.
1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 54.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51
Indicator symbols left-hand side
G 02 90 48
Fault in car's emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp
Stability system DSTC
No function
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Volvo recom- mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
shop for inspection.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS func- tion.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. Drive to a workshop to have the ABS sys- tem checked if the symbol remains lit. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp
This symbol is lit when the rear fog lamp is on.
Stability system DSTC*
For information on the system's functions and symbols, see page 159.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating occurs when the temperature is below -2 C. The car can be started once the symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
52
Indicator symbols right-hand side
G 02 90 49
Indicator symbol for trailer
Parking brake applied
Airbags SRS
Low oil pressure
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Indicator symbol for trailer
This symbol flashes when the direction indicators are used and the trailer is connected. If the sym- bol does not flash then one of the lamps on the trailer or the car is
faulty.
Parking brake applied
The symbol illuminates when the parking brake is applied. Always pull the parking brake lever to the end position.
NOTE
The symbol illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.
Airbags SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS or IC system. Volvo recommends that
drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection.
Low oil pressure2
If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pres- sure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
If this symbol illuminates while driving, a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Volvo recom- mends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low.
2 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 54.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
02
53
Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 214. If the reservoir level is below MIN then the car should not be driven fur- ther. Volvo recommends that the car is transported to an authorised Volvo work- shop to have the brake system checked.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- ing.
4. If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 214.
5. If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to
have the brake system checked. Volvo rec- ommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
6. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN
then the car should not be driven any fur- ther. Have the car transported to a work- shop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Reminder doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet3 or the boot lid is not properly closed, the driver will be reminded of this.
Low speed
If the car moves at a speed less than 5 km/h, the information sym- bol illuminates and DRIVER
DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER
DOOR OPEN or BONNET OPEN
is shown on the display. Stop the car safely as soon as possible and close the door or bonnet.
High speed
If the car is moving faster than 10 km/h, the symbol illuminates and one of the texts indicated in the preceding paragraph appears on the display.
Boot lid reminder
If the boot lid is open, this informa- tion symbol will illuminate and BOOT LID OPEN will appear on the display.
3 Only cars with alarm.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
54
Messages
G 02 90 50
When a warning or indicator symbol illuminates the information display shows a supplemen- tary message.
Press the READ button (1).
Switch between messages with the READ but- ton. Fault messages are stored in the memory until the fault is rectified.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press READ) before the previous activity can be resumed.
Message Specification
STOP SAFELYA Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. Serious risk of damage.
SERVICE
URGENTA Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop checks the car immediately.
SEE MANUALA Read the Owner's Manual.
SERVICE
REQUIREDA Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop checks the car as soon as possible.
HIGH ENGINE
TEMP STOP
ENGINE
Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. Serious risk of damage.
BOOK TIME FOR
SERVICE
Time to book regular service. Volvo rec- ommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out the service.
Message Specification
TIME FOR REGU-
LAR SERVICE
Time for regular service. Volvo rec- ommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out the service. The timing is determined by the number of kil- ometres driven, number of months since the last serv- ice, engine running time and oil grade.
SERVICE OVER-
DUE
If the service inter- vals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop car- ries out the service.
TRANSMISSION
OIL CHANGE NEE-
DED
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop checks the car as soon as possible.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
55
Message Specification
REMINDER
CHECK OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level. The message is shown every 10 000 km (certain engine variants). For information on checking the oil level, see page 210.
SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE OWNER
MANUAL
Diesel particle filter requires regenera- tion, see page 144.
DSTC SPIN CON-
TROL OFF
The function of the stability and traction control system is reduced, see page 160 for more variants.
TRANSMISSION
PERFORMANCE
LOW
The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive with care until the message clears.
If shown repeatedly then Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contac- ted.
Message Specification
TRANSMISSION
OIL TEMP HIGH
Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disen- gage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clears.
TRANSM OIL
TEMP STOP
SAFELY
Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe manner. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.
02 Instruments and controls
Electrical socket
02
56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
12 V electrical socket
G 01 96 21
Electrical socket and cigarette lighter.
The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens, music players and mobile phones. For the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least position I, see page 150.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W).
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. TV screens, music players and mobile phones - which are connected to one of the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets, could be activated by the climate control system, even when the remote con- trol key has been removed or when the car is locked, for example, when the parking heater is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence!
Cigarette lighter*
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57
General
G 02 01 39
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
Light switches
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting
Front fog lamps*
Opening the fuel filler flap
Rear fog lamp
Posi- tion
Specification
Automatic/deactivated dipped beam. Only main beam flash.
Position/parking lamps
Automatic dipped beam. Main beam and main beam flash work in this position.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz- zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam.
1. Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the end positions.
3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectively to raise or lower beam alignment.
Cars with active Xenon headlamps - ABL* have automatic headlamp levelling, so there is no control (1).
Position/parking lamps
Position/parking lamps can be switched on irrespective of remote control key position.
Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre position.
When the remote control key is in position II the position/parking lamps and number plate light- ing are always on.
Headlamps
Automatic dipped beam*
Dipped beam comes on automatically when the remote control key is turned to position II, except when the headlamp control (2) is in the centre position. If necessary, the automatic dipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo rec- ommends that this is performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.
Automatic dipped beam, main beam
1. Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Dipped beam is activated by means of turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise to the end position.
3. Main beam is activated by means of mov- ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and releasing it, see page 61.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The lamps are switched off automatically when the remote control key is turned to position I or 0.
Instrument lighting
The instrument lighting is switched on when the remote control key is in position II and the headlamp control (2) is in one of the end posi- tions. The lighting is automatically dimmed during the day and can be controlled manually at night.
Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter or dimmer lighting.
Enhanced display lighting
To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter, clock and outside temperature gauge, these illuminate when the car is unlocked and when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch. The displays extinguish when the car is locked.
Fog lamps
NOTE
Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from country to country.
Front fog lamps*
The front fog lamps can be switched on along with the headlamps or the position lamps/park- ing lamps.
Press the button (4).
The light in the button (4) illuminates when the front fog lamps are switched on.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with the headlamps or the front fog lamps.
Press the button (6).
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com- bined instrument panel and the light in the but- ton (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
Fuel filler flap
Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap when the car is unlocked, see page 130.
Active Xenon headlamps*
G 02 65 07
Lighting panel, for active Xenon headlamps
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- lamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum light- ing in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.
The LED illuminates when the function is activated. The LED flashes and an error mes- sage is shown on the information display in the
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59
event of a malfunction. The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.
The function can be deactivated/activated with the headlamp control.
G 02 07 89
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.
Daytime running lights - DRL*
To save fuel, daytime running lights (Daytime Running Light) can be selected during the day instead of the more energy-intensive dipped beam. The daytime running lights mounted in the spoiler use bright, low-energy diode tech- nology.
Position A automatically gives DRL daytime run- ning lights during the day.
Posi- tion
Specification
Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights when the car is being driven. Automatic switching to parking lights when the car is parked.
Headlamps and position lamps
Daytime running lights during daytime driving. Automatic switching to headlamps and position lamps in poor light con- ditions and when windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) then this function is also activated.
With the light switch in position A, the daytime running lights are activated automatically dur- ing the day. This is regulated by a light sensor which switches from daytime running lights to dipped beam off the main headlamps at dusk or when the daylight becomes too weak.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
60
NOTE
To achieve minimal energy consumption, the rear lights are also switched off when switching automatically from dipped beam to DRLs.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with its lights in a cor- rect state and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Brake light
The brake light automatically comes on during braking. For information on the Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see page 158.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
61
Stalk switch positions
3 4
1
2
1
2
G 02 63 80
Direction indicators - short flash sequence
Direction indicators - continuous flash sequence
Main beam flash
Home safe lighting and switching between main and dipped beam.
Direction indicators
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to position (1) and release. > The direction indicators flash 3 times
and the stalk switch returns to its origi- nal position.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to end position (2). > The stalk switch remains in its end posi-
tion and is moved back manually, or automatically by steering wheel move- ment.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to position (3). > Main beam comes on until the stalk
switch is released.
Main beam flash only works when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Switching between main and dipped beam
Move the stalk switch to the end position (4) and release.
The remote control key must be in position II and the headlamp control in end position, see page 57, for main beam to be switched on.
Home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked. The standard delay is 301 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90 seconds, see page 78.
1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.
2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to position (3) and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
1 Factory settings.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip computer*
G 02 90 52
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel2 browse between menus and options in the trip computer list.
RESET2 - resets
Controls
To scroll through trip computer information turn the thumbwheel either up or down in steps. The menus are in an infinite loop.
NOTE
If a warning message interrupts while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by pressing the READ button and revert to the trip computer function.
Functions
The trip computer displays the following infor- mation:
--- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED
--.- KM/L INSTANTANEOUS
--.- L/100 KM AVERAGE
--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
DSTC ON *, see page 159
--- MPH ACTUAL SPEED 3
AVERAGE SPEED
Average speed is calculated from the latest reset, which is performed with the RESET but- ton.
INSTANTANEOUS
Current fuel consumption is calculated every second. The information on the display is updated every couple of seconds. When the car is stationary, "--.-" appears on the display.
During the period for regeneration4 fuel con- sumption may increase, see page 144.
AVERAGE
Average fuel consumption is calculated from the latest reset, which is performed with the RESET button.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater is used.
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
The range to empty is calculated based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km. No guaranteed range remains when the display shows "--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
". Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if fuel consumption is changed due to a change in driving style or if a fuel-driven heater is used for example.
MPH ACTUAL SPEED3
Current speed is displayed in mph.
2 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system. 3 Certain markets. 4 Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
02
63
Resetting
1. Select --- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED or --.- L/100 KM AVERAGE
2. Reset with one press of the RESET button.
3. One long press of the RESET button (at least 5 seconds) resets both average speed and average consumption simulta- neously.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Windscreen wipers
Windscreen and headlamp washers
Rain sensor - On/Off
Thumbwheel
Windscreen wipers off
The windscreen wipers are off when the stalk switch is in position 0.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch to make a single sweep.
Intermittent wiping
You can adjust and set a suitable speed for intermittent wiping. Turn the thumbwheel (C) up for a shorter interval between sweeps. Turn it down to increase the delay.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.
Windscreen/headlamp washer
Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers. The wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch is released.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed as follows:
Dipped beam selected with the switch on light- ing panel:
The headlamps are washed the first time the windscreen is washed. Within the next ten minutes, they are washed every fifth wash cycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longer interval the headlamps are washed each time.
Parking/position lamps selected with the switch on the lighting panel:
Active Xenon headlamps are only washed every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the time that elapses.
Halogen headlamps are not washed.
The switch on the lighting panel is in position 0:
Active Xenon headlamps are only washed every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the time that elapses.
Halogen headlamps are not washed.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65
Rain sensor*
G 02 90 53
The rain sensor automatically activates the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel (C), see page 64.
Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen- sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (an extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upwards).
On/Off
When activating the rain sensor, the remote control key must be in position I or II and the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in posi- tion 0 (not activated).
Activating the rain sensor:
Press the button (B), see page 64. A display symbol shows that the rain sensor is active.
To turn the rain sensor off, either:
1. Press button (B)
2. Press the stalk switch downward to another wiper program. If the stalk switch is raised, the rain sensor will remain active, the wipers make an extra sweep and then return to rain sensor mode when the stalk is released to position 0 (not activated), see page 64.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the igni- tion is switched off.
IMPORTANT
At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button (B) while the remote control key is in position I or II. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers could start swiping and become damaged.
Thumbwheel
Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency of wiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is
selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rain sensor is selected.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activating
G 02 01 41
The controls for cruise control are to the left of the steering wheel.
Setting the desired speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is shown on the combined instrument panel.
2. Touch + or to lock the vehicle speed. CRUISE-ON appears in the combined instrument panel.
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.
Increasing or decreasing speed
G 02 90 54
Increase or decrease the speed by press- ing and holding + or . The speed of the car when the button is released is set as the new speed.
A brief press (less than half a second) on + or changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph1.
NOTE
A temporary increase in speed (less than one minute) using the accelerator, such as while overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting. When you release the accel- erator, the car will return to the programmed speed.
Temporary disengagement
Press 0 to disengage the cruise control temporarily. CRUISE will be shown on the combined instrument panel. The speed set earlier is stored in the memory.
The cruise control is also temporarily disen- gaged when:
the brake pedal or clutch pedal is depressed
speed falls below 25-30 km/h1 when trav- elling uphill
the gear selector is moved to position N
wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs
a temporary increase in speed lasts longer than one minute.
1 Depending on engine type.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67
Return to the set speed
Press this button to resume the previously set speed. CRUISE
ON appears on the combined instrument panel.
Disengaging
Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise control. CRUISE ON clears on the com- bined instrument panel.
02 Instruments and controls
Keypad in the steering wheel*
02
68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Button functions
The keypad is available in two versions depending on the equipment in the car.
The four buttons at the bottom of the steering wheel keypad control the radio and the phone. The function of a button depends on which system is active. The steering wheel keypad can be used to scroll between preset stations, change CD tracks and adjust the volume.
Press and hold one of the arrow keys to fast forward/reverse or search for the next station.
The phone must be active to make settings in the phone system. Activate the phone function with the PHONE button in the centre console
in order to enable control of the phone system with the arrow keys.
To return to Audio only, press EXIT.. To return to the phone menu, press EXIT once again.
With the ENTER button you can select, acti- vate and deactivate options in menus. The but- ton can also be used to access the folder struc- ture and start the playback of audio files if a disc with audio files is inserted in the CD player/ CD changer*. For more information, see page 246.
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers
02
69
Steering wheel adjustment
G 02 01 43
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and reach.
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you best.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel before driving off, never while driving. Before driving, check that the steering wheel is fixed in position.
Hazard warning flashers
G 02 01 44
Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction indicators flash) when the car is stopped where it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press the button to activate the function.
A sufficiently violent collision or heavy braking activates the hazard warning flashers automat- ically, see page 158. The function can be deactivated with the button.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of hazard warning flashers vary from country to coun- try.
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake
02
70
General
Instrument panel warning symbol and warning label for risk of crushing.
The lever is located between the front seats.
WARNING
Make sure that children, other passengers or objects are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when the parking brake is applied or released by the driver.
Applying the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever firmly.
> The instrument panel's warning symbol is illuminated.
NOTE
The warning lamp symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake lever must be pulled up a little bit further.
When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has auto- matic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.
Disengaging the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the button, lower the parking brake lever and release the button. > The instrument panel's warning symbol
is switched off.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
71
Operation
The power windows are operated using the controls in the doors. The key position must be I or II for the power windows to operate.
The windows continue to work for a limited amount of time when the car is stopped and after the remote control key is removed, provi- ded none of the doors is opened. Operate the windows with caution.
To open a window:
Depress the front of the control.
To close a window:
Raise the front of the control.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.
Remote control
To operate the power windows with remote control, see page 120.
WARNING
Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows. Pay close attention if the rear windows are controlled from the driver's door or if the windows are closed with the remote control.
Driver's door
Driver's door control panel.
Controls, all windows
Rear window controls
Front window controls
The driver can operate all of the power win- dows from the driver's seat.
The windows can be opened and closed in two ways:
Manual operation
Depress one of the controls (2) or (3) gently or raise it gently. The power window opens or closes as long as the switch is actuated.
Automatic operation
Fully depress one of the controls (3) or raise it, then release. The side window will then open or close automatically. If the window is obstructed by an object, the movement will stop. Only the front windows can be closed automatically.
The control on the passenger door is operated in the same way as on the driver's door.
All windows simultaneously
All windows can be opened and closed simul- taneously using button (1). The windows are opened automatically with a short press on the right-hand side of the button. Close by keeping the left-hand side of the button pressed in.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
72
WARNING
The function that interrupts the movement of the windows in the event of them being blocked works with both automatic and manual closing, although not with pinch protection deployed.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows.
Passenger seat
Passenger seat.
The control in the front passenger door oper- ates that window only.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73
Interior rearview mirror
G 02 09 88
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming when disturbed by light from behind.
Dipping
Control for dimming
Normal position
Dimmed position.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1) is not available in mirrors with automatic dim- ming.
Interior rearview mirror with compass*
G 02 09 91
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Calibrating the compass
G 02 09 92
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass is set for the geographical area to which the car was delivered. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones.
1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the engine running at idling speed.
2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 sec- onds. Following which, the character C is shown (the button is concealed so use a paper clip for example to press it in).
3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 sec- onds. The number for the current magnetic zone is displayed.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
74
4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until the number for the required magnetic zone (1
15) is shown, refer to the map of magnetic zones for the compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C.
6. Following which, press and hold the button in for 9 seconds and select L for left-hand drive cars and R for right-hand drive.
7. Drive slowly in a circle with a maximum speed of 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown on the display, which indicates that the calibration is complete.
G 02 01 50
Magnetic zones, Europe.
G 02 01 51
Magnetic zones, Asia.
G 02 01 52
Magnetic zones, South America.
G 02 01 53
Magnetic zones, Australia.
G 02 01 54
Magnetic zones, Africa.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75
Door mirrors
The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors are at the front of the driver's door armrest. The rearview mirrors can be operated in key posi- tion I and II.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light on the button illumi- nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light goes out.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces. This can be carried out in key position I and II.
Retracting the mirrors
1. Press the L and R button at the same time.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat- ically stop in the fully retracted position.
WARNING
The door mirror on the driver's side is the wide-angled type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.
Folding out the mirrors
1. Press the L and R button at the same time.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat- ically stop in the fully extended position.
Automatic retracting/extending
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control or using the Keyless-system, see page 126, the door mirrors are automati- cally retracted/extended.
NOTE
The door mirrors will not be extended auto- matically during unlocking if they were retracted using the controls in the door.
If the car is locked with the remote control and is then started, the door mirrors will still be extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated under Car settings Mirror fold on
locking, see page 78 for a description of the menu system.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset to the neutral position for electric retracting and extending to work.
1. Use the L and R buttons to retract the mir- rors.
2. Extend the mirrors again with the L and R button. The mirrors are now reset to the neutral.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light* on the door mirrors illuminates when the approach lighting or home safe lighting is activated.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
02
76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*
BLIS is an information system that under cer- tain conditions can help to draw the driver's attention to vehicles moving in the same direc- tion in the so-called "blind spot", see page 163.
Storing door mirror positions
The positions of the mirrors are stored when the car is locked with the remote control. When the car is unlocked with the same remote con- trol the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
The front side windows are treated with a coating which improves the view
in poor weather conditions. For information on maintenance, see page 200.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. The water and dirt-repel- lent coating could be damaged.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
77
Possible settings
Personal preferences can be set for some of the car's functions. This applies to locks, cli- mate control and audio functions. For audio functions, see page 236.
Control panel
Control panel.
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Navigation
Use
The settings are shown on the display (A).
Open the menu to enter settings:
1. Press MENU (B).
2. Scroll, for example, to Car settings with the navigation button (E).
3. Press ENTER (D).
4. Select an alternative with the navigation button (E).
5. Press ENTER to activate the selection.
Activated function is shown in the display with . Deactivated function is shown in the display with .
Close the menu:
Press EXIT (C) for approximately one sec- ond.
Clock, adjustment
The hour and minute are each adjusted sepa- rately.
1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrow up" or "arrow down" on the navigation but- ton (E).
2. Select the number for adjustment using "arrow right" or "arrow left" on the naviga- tion button.
3. Press ENTER to start the clock.
NOTE
If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PM is selected using "arrow up" or "arrow down" after the final minute number has been adjusted.
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust
The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in cars equipped with ECC:
Select from Low, Normal and High.
Recirculation timer
When the timer is active, the air recirculates for 3-12 minutes, depending on the outside air temperature.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Select On/Off depending on whether or not you wish the recirculation timer to be active.
Reset all
Resets the climate function options to the fac- tory settings.
Car settings
Retract mirrors when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control the door mirrors can be retrac- ted/extended automatically. The On/Off option is available.
Reduced guard*
The deadlocks function can be temporarily deactivated and the alarm level reduced if someone wishes to remain in the car and the doors have to be locked from the outside. The Activate once and Ask on exit options are available, see pages 132 and 135.
Unlock confirm. light
The hazard warning flashers can provide feed- back when the car is unlocked with the remote control. The On/Off option is available.
Lock confirm. light
The hazard warning flashers can provide feed- back when the car is locked with the remote control. The On/Off option is available.
Doors auto lock
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the doors and boot lid can be locked automatically. The On/Off option is available. Pulling the door handle twice unlocks and opens the doors from the inside.
Doors unlock
There are two alternatives for unlocking:
All doors one press of the remote control unlocks both doors and the boot lid.
Driver door, then all one press of the remote control unlocks the driver's door. A second press then unlocks the passenger door and the boot lid.
Keyless entry*
All doors - both doors and the boot lid are unlocked simultaneously1.
Both front doors both front doors are unlocked simultaneously.
Any door any door or the boot lid can be unlocked separately.
Simultaneous opening of all windows
This function can be selected for the unlock button on the remote control:
Auto. open all windows all windows are opened simultaneously with one long press on the unlock button.
Approach lighting
Select the time the car's lights should remain switched on when the approach lighting button is pressed - see page 120.
The following alternatives are available:
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
Home safe lighting
Select the time the car's lights should remain on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled back after the remote control key has been removed - see page 61.
The following alternatives are available:
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
1 Both doors and the boot lid can also be locked simultaneously.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
79
Information
VIN number - (Vehicle Identification Number) is the car's unique identity num- ber.
Number of keys - The number of keys registered for the car is shown.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink *
02
80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G 03 00 70
HomeLink is a programmable remote control which can control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light- ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so replace their remote controls. HomeLink is supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.
The HomeLink panel consists of three pro- grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.
NOTE
HomeLink is designed not to work if the car is locked from the outside.
Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when switching to another car).
Delete the button programming when the car is to be sold.
Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars fitted with HomeLink . This may have an adverse effect on its function.
Operation
When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls.
Depress the programmed button to activate the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi- cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but- ton is kept depressed.
NOTE
If the ignition is not activated, HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.
The original remote controls can of course be used in parallel with HomeLink .
WARNING
If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion.
Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement, and stop directly and reverse. A garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information - contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
Programming for the first time
The first step erases the memory in HomeLink and must not be carried out when only one individual button is being reprogram- med.
1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash- ing indicates that HomeLink is set in "learn mode" and is ready to be pro- grammed.
2. Position the original remote control 5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi- cator lamp.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink *
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81
The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question. Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis- tances. Maintain each position for approx. 15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button for the original remote control and the button to be programmed on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has changed over from slow to rapid flash- ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp:
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-
ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button1" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- culty in finding the button - consult the supplier's manual, or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on HomeLink , while the "programming but- ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for approx. 3 seconds and then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program- ming.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual button, proceed in accordance with the following:
1. Depress the required button on HomeLink and do not release until step 3 has been completed.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds, position the original remote control 5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi- cator lamp.
The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question. Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis- tances. Maintain each position for approx. 15 seconds before trying a new one.
3. Depress the button on the original remote control. The indicator lamp will start to flash. When the flashing has changed over from a slow to a rapid flashing - release both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.
4. Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp:
1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink *
02
82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.
5. Locate the "programming button2" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- culty in finding the button - consult the supplier's manual, or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.
6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.
7. Depress the programmed button on HomeLink , while the "programming but- ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for approx. 3 seconds and then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program- ming.
Erasing programming
It is only possible to erase the programming for all the buttons on HomeLink , not for individual buttons.
Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. > HomeLink is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be pro- grammed once more, see page 80.
2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
02 Instruments and controls
02
83
84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on climate control................................................... 86 Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 88 Air distribution......................................................................................... 91 Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*..................................................... 92 Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)....................................................... 95
CLIMATE CONTROL
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
86
Air conditioning
The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment. The car is equipped with either manual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC, Electronic Climate Control).
NOTE
The air conditioning system can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible air in the passenger compartment and pre- vent the windows from misting, it should always be on.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows by first using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win- dows with a normal window cleaning agent.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).
Fault tracing and repair
Volvo recommends that you only entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate control system to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Refrigerant
The air conditioning system contains R134a refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo- rine, which means that it is harmless to the ozone layer. The system must only be charged with R134a refrigerant, see also page 276. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out this work.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compart- ment is only cleaned with one filter. This must be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recom- mended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Display
There is a display above the climate control panel. This displays climate control settings.
Personal preferences
You can set preferences for two climate control functions:
Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to cars with ECC).
Recirculation timer for passenger com- partment air.
For information about these settings, see page 77.
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
03
87
Air vents in the dashboard
G 01 99 42
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents towards the side windows to remove misting from the front side windows.
During cold weather - Close the centre vents for optimum comfort and best demisting.
ECC
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects the side from which the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand air vents despite the con- trols being set for the same temperature on both sides.
Sensor location
The sun sensor is on the top side of the dashboard.
The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is behind the climate control panel.
The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror.
The humidity sensor is located in the inte- rior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
Side windows and sunroof
To ensure that the air conditioning works sat- isfactorily, close all side windows and the roof.
Acceleration
The air conditioning system switches off tem- porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a temporary rise in temperature.
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Control panel
AUTO
Fan
Recirculation/Air quality system
Defroster
Air distribution
AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off
Heated front left seat
Heated front right seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature selector
Functions
1. AUTO
The AUTO function automat- ically regulates climate con- trol and maintains the selected temperature. The AUTO function controls heat- ing, air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation, and air
distribution.
When the roof is open more air and heat/cold is directed down in the passenger compart- ment, and the output of the climate control is limited if it is not possible to compensate for the outside temperature
If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled auto- matically. All manual settings are switched off when AUTO is switched on. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE.
2. Fan
Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is regulated automatically. The previously set fan speed is disengaged.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89
NOTE
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan and the air conditioning are switched off. The display shows the fan symbol and OFF.
3. Recirculation
The function is selected to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passen- ger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when
this function is activated. If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist- ing on the insides of the windows.
Timer
The timer function reduces the risk of icing, misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected). To activate/deactivate the function see page 77.
NOTE
When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
3. Air quality system*
Same button as recirculation.
The air quality system con- sists of a multi-filter and a sensor. The filter separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pol-
lution in the passenger compartment. When the sensor detects polluted outside air, the air intakes are closed and the air in the passenger compartment is recirculated. A green light (A) illuminates in the button when the air quality sensor is active.
Activating the air quality sensor:
Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality sensor (normal setting).
Or:
Switch between three functions by press- ing repeatedly the recirculation button.
Air quality sensor engaged the light (A) illuminates.
No recirculation engaged, provided it is not required for cooling in hot weather light not illuminated.
Recirculation engaged the light (M) illu- minates.
Keep the following in mind:
As a rule, the air quality sensor should always be engaged.
Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.
The defroster functions for the front, side and rear windows can be used to demist the windows.
4. Defroster
Used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the wind- screen and side windows. Air flows to the windows at high fan speed. The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active.
The following also takes place when the defroster function is activated in order to pro- vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- ger compartment:
the air conditioning (AC) is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button (6)
recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
03
90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5. Air distribution
The airflow can be distributed to the windows, dashboard vents or floor by pressing the air distribution buttons.
A symbol on the display above the climate control
panel and an illuminated light in the relevant button indicate which function has been selected.
Refer to the table on page 91.
6. AC On/Off (ON/OFF)
ON: The air conditioning is on. It is controlled by the system's AUTO function. This way, incoming air is cooled and dehumidified.
OFF: Off
When the defroster function is activated the air conditioning is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button).
NOTE
The climate control system's demisting function with humidity sensor is significantly reduced with the air conditioning in deacti- vated mode (OFF), as well as with manually selected air distribution and fan speed.
7 and 8. Heated front seats*
To activate front seat heating:
Higher heat:
Press the button once both lights illumi- nate.
Lower heat:
Press the button once one light illumi- nates.
Heat off:
Press the button three times light not illu- minated.
9. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Heating is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and door mir- rors. Press the button once to start simultaneous rear win- dow and rearview mirror defrosting. The function is
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
The function is switched off manually or auto- matically. Switch off manually with one press
on the button. Automatic switching off discon- nects the rear window and door mirrors after 12 20 minutes depending on outside tem- perature.
During cold weather the defrosting* also con- tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear window and door mirrors free of ice and mist. The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted to the outside temperature. This function must be switched off manually.
10. Temperature selector
The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set independently.
Press the button once to acti- vate one side only. Press again to activate the other
side. Press the button a third time to activate both sides.
The active side is indicated by the button's light and in the display above the climate control panel.
When the car is started, the most recent setting is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.
03 Climate control
Air distribution
03
91
Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:
Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.
to remove ice and misting quickly.
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dash- board air vents.
to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather.
Air to windscreen and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.
to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate. (Not for low fan speed.)
Air to floor and from dash- board air vents.
in sunny weather with cool outside tempera- tures.
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good com- fort in warm, dry weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.
to warm the feet.
Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.
to provide cooler air for the feet or warmer air to the upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information about heaters
The parking heater heats the engine and pas- senger compartment and can be started directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys- tem calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature.
At -10 C or lower the maximum running time of the parking heater is 50 minutes.
WARNING
The car must be outdoors when the petrol or diesel heater is used.
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.
Refuelling
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.
Check on the information display that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows PARK HEAT ON.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the parking heater is switched off automatically and a message appears on the information display.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator stalk READ button once.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.
The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93
Activating the heater
G 02 90 52
READ button
Thumbwheel1
RESET button1
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or Direct start is activated, the infor- mation symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates and the information display shows an
explanatory text.
Display Specification
FUEL HEATER ON The heater is switched on and running.
TIMER IS SET FOR
FUEL HEATER
Reminder that the heater will start at the set time after the car has been left, when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch.
Display Specification
HEATER STOP-
PED LOW BAT-
TERY
The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.
HEATER STOP-
PED LOW FUEL
LEVEL
The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as 50 km driving.
Direct start and immediate stop
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to DIRECT
START PARK HEAT OFF or DIRECT
START PARK HEAT ON.
2. Long presses on the RESET button change between the two alternatives.
DIRECT START PARK HEAT ON: Parking heater switched on manually or with pro- grammed timer.
DIRECT START PARK HEAT OFF: Parking heater switched off.
1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
03
94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
With the direct start of the heater it will be acti- vated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated is specified with the timer.
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to PARK
HEAT TIMER --:-- ON.
2. Give a long press (approx. 2 seconds) on the RESET button in order to access the flashing time setting.
3. Select the required hour using the thumb- wheel.
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- ing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using the thumbwheel.
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
After setting TIMER 1 a second start time can be programmed with TIMER 2 by scrolling with the thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way as TIMER 1.
Deactivating a timer-started heater
A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro- ceed as follows:
1. Press the READ button.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text PARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT
TIMER 2.
The text ON flashes on the display.
3. Press RESET.
The text OFF is shown with a constant glow and the heater is switched OFF.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in accordance with the instructions in the section "Direct start and immediate stop".
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's clock.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95
Auxiliary heater (diesel)
In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater may be required for achieving the correct tempera- ture in the engine and passenger compartment during cold weather.
The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
The auxiliary heater cannot be switched on or off manually but is only controlled by the car's electronics.
When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.
96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Front seats.............................................................................................. 98 Electrically operated roof ..................................................................... 103 Wind deflector*..................................................................................... 106 Interior lighting...................................................................................... 107 Storage spaces in the passenger compartment................................... 110 Cargo area............................................................................................ 114
INTERIOR
04 Interior
Front seats
04
98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Seating position, manual seat
The driver's and passenger seats can be adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving positions.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped- als. Check that the seat is locked after changing the position setting.
Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Lumbar support1, turn the wheel.
Backrest rake: turn the wheel.
Control panel for power seat*.
Lever (2) is not available on all seat models.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat and adjust the seatbelt, see page 16, before set- ting off, never while driving.
Check that the seat is locked in position.
NOTE
When putting on the seatbelt it is easiest to pick it up from down at the seatbelt guide, not over the shoulder.
Seating position, power seat*
G 02 01 99
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con- trol key without the key being inserted into the ignition switch. The seat can always be adjusted in key position I or II.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat, forwards/backwards
Seat, up/down
Backrest rake
1 Also applies to power seat.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
99
An overload protection is deployed if one of the seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the ignition and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again. Only one of the seat's settings can be adjusted at a time.
Memory function
G 02 02 00
Buttons for memory function.
Store setting
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Press and hold button M while pressing button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.
Using a stored setting
Press one of the memory buttons 13 until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you release
the button then the movement of the seat will stop.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or mem- ory buttons in order to stop the seat.
WARNING
Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do not play with the controls.
Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment.
Ensure that none of the rear seat passen- gers is in danger of becoming trapped.
Memory in remote control key
The positions of the driver's seat and the door mirrors are stored in the memory for the remote control key with which the car is locked. When the car is unlocked with the same remote con- trol key the driver's seat and the door mirrors adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened.
NOTE
The remote control key memory is inde- pendent of seat memory.
Entry to rear seat, manual seat
Handle for lowering the backrest
Button for moving the power seat longitu- dinally
NOTE
No one may sit in the seat when it is pushed forward for entry into the rear seat.
NOTE
Lower the seat before it is pushed forward - otherwise there is a risk that the head restraint makes contact with the sun visor.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
100
Push the seat forward
Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt guide, see also page 18.
Lift the handle
Fold the backrest forward to the locked position.
4. Push the seat forward.
Push the seat backward
Lift the handle and fold back the backrest.
2. Push the seat backward.
3. Adjust the seat longitudinally.
4. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.
If the seat does not return to the same position, as before it was folded for entry, after having been pushed back - then proceed as follows:
1. Sit down in the seat.
2. Lift the handle (1), see page 98, and push the seat to the rear end position.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101
3. Continue to lift of the handle, and push the seat forward to the desired position and release the handle.
Entry to rear seat, power seat
Push the seat forward
Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt guide, see also page 18.
Lift the handle.
Fold the backrest forward to the locked position.
Hold down the front section of the button.
If the seat is set in a higher position - then it will be lowered automatically to avoid the head restraint making contact with the sun visor.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Push the seat backward
Lift the handle and fold back the backrest.
Hold down the rear section of the button.
3. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.
NOTE
The seat can only be moved to the very front (+6 cm) to facilitate entry and exit to and from the rear seat when the backrest has been folded forward. If the backrest is folded back when the seat is in the front position then the seat automatically moves back approx. 6 cm after a few seconds.
WARNING
Check that the backrest is properly folded back by pushing and pulling the head restraint.
The belt on the front passenger side must be in the belt guide during driving, even when there is no passenger sitting in the seat.
Inlaid mats*
Volvo supplies inlay mats which are especially produced for your car.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
04 Interior
Electrically operated roof
04
103
Conditions for roof operation
No objects on the parcel shelf.
No ice, snow or loose objects on the roof or boot lid.
Dry roof.
2.0 m clearance upward (A) and 0.2 m between the bumper and objects behind (B).
Ambient temperature -10 C or warmer.
Closed cargo separator, see page 114.
Closed boot lid.
Stationary car, brake pedal depressed.
If the instructions on the following pages are not followed then this could cause damage to the roof's opening and closing mechanisms.
Volvo also recommends that the following is observed:
Level ground.
Execution of roof operation in one single movement.
Engine at idling speed.
A
B
G 02 08 00
IMPORTANT
Water collecting on the roof can run down into the cargo area and the passenger com- partment if the roof is opened.
WARNING
People, children or objects can be trapped by the roof or boot lid's moving parts.
Operate the roof with caution.
See decal on the cargo separator.
Do not allow children to play with the controls.
Do not leave the roof in a stationary position for longer than necessary.
WARNING
Never leave the remote control key in the car if there are children left in the car.
04 Interior
Electrically operated roof
04
104
Hatch cover
G 02 08 01
When the roof is open there is a hatch cover between the head restraints in the rear seat and the boot lid, see the preceding illustration.
IMPORTANT
Do not sit on the hatch cover or use it as a support as it could be damaged.
Opening and closing the roof
G 01 83 51
Close the roof
Open the roof
1. Turn the remote control key to position II. Preferably starting the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Keep the left-hand button (1) pressed in to close, or the right-hand button (2) to open.
Pay attention to any messages on the informa- tion display while the roof is in motion. The windows that are closed are opened approx.10 centimetres. All windows are closed when the movement of the roof is completed.
Release the button when a signal sounds and the message ROOF CLOSED or ROOF
OPEN is shown on the information display.
WARNING
Never pull the release wire for the hydraulic system that is located under the rear seat cushion. Only service personnel are allowed to use the hydraulic system's emergency release function.
Consequences:
significant risk of crushing injury
uncontrolled movement/opening of the electrically operated roof or boot lid
the roof components could be destroyed.
Make thoroughly sure that the conditions are fulfilled before operating the roof.
Text on the information display
A number of these messages also apply to loading assistance, see page 114.
PRESS BRAKE FOR ROOF
OPERATION - Depress the brake pedal in order to operate the roof.
CLOSE BOOT FOR ROOF OPERATION
- The boot lid is not closed. Close the boot lid.
04 Interior
Electrically operated roof
04
105
OPEN BOOT LID FULLY - Open boot lid fully.
CLOSE BOOT SEP. FOR ROOF
OPERAT. - The cargo separator is not closed. Close the cargo separator, see page 114.
LOW BATTERY FOR ROOF
OPERATION - The battery voltage is too low. The roof can only be closed. Charge the battery, e.g. by starting the engine, and try again.
ROOF NOT LOCKED - The roof has not been opened or closed properly. Try again to open or close the roof.
ROOF IN LOAD AID POSITION - The roof has been raised with the loading assis- tance function. Lower the roof, see page 114.
TEMP LIMITS ROOF OPERATION - The roof system is either overheated or the out- side temperature is below -10 C. If the roof is overheated, wait approx. 5 minutes until the message clears and try again.
Messages with roof faults
Two messages can be shown on the informa- tion display in the event of a roof fault:
ROOF FAILURE SERVICE REQUIRED - The roof cannot be operated. This requires service by an authorised Volvo workshop.
ROOF FAILURE SEE MANUAL - The roof or loading assistance must be operated in accordance with special instructions. Service must be performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.
Special instructions for manoeuvring in
the event of a roof fault
If the message ROOF FAILURE SEE
MANUAL is shown on the information display then the roof cannot be operated normally.
NOTE
After the roof has been closed it cannot be opened again.
IMPORTANT
Closing in the event of a roof fault requires very careful checking of the conditions for operating the roof, see page 103. Even if the conditions are fulfilled, there is a significant risk of material damage.
1. Keep the closing button pressed in until ROOF FAILURE SEE MANUAL is shown on the display. Following which, release the button.
2. Press the closing button again. Press the closing button again. Keep it pressed in for at least 30 seconds until the roof and boot lid are closed. Pay attention for any faults that could cause damage to the car.
A signal sounds during the whole closing oper- ation.
WARNING
Never pull the release wire for the hydraulic system that is located under the rear seat cushion. Only service personnel are allowed to use the hydraulic system's emergency release function.
Consequences:
significant risk of crushing injury
uncontrolled movement/opening of the electrically operated roof or boot lid
the roof components could be destroyed.
Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any interfer- ence in the roof system could cause mal- function and serious injury as a result.
04 Interior
Wind deflector*
04
106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G 02 08 04
The wind deflector can be used when driving with a lowered roof to reduce the swirling air- flow and draughts in the passenger compart- ment.
Installing the wind deflector
1. Fold out the four-part deflector to is full size and press the catch together.
2. Insert the wind deflector's supports under the head restraints so that they are resting against the top edge of the backrest.
3. Press the locking levers into the holders on the side panels until a click is heard.
4. Open out the wind deflector.
NOTE
Be careful of the car's upholstery.
The zips in the wind deflector are used for stor- ing/retrieving luggage on the rear seat.
WARNING
Check that the wind deflector is secured firmly. Otherwise it may detach in the event of sudden movement for example and then cause injury and damage.
WARNING
No passengers are allowed in the rear seat when the wind deflector is fitted.
Store the protection in its bag on the floor in the cargo area.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107
Reading lamps and interior lighting
G 02 08 05
Controls in roof console for front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off
Interior lighting
Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on in key position I and II as well as when the engine is running. The lighting can also be activated within 30 minutes after:
the engine has been switched off and the remote control key is in position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.
Roof lighting
The reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof con- sole.
Rear seat lighting
G 02 08 06
Switched on or off with one press of the button.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- tively when a side door is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror*
G 02 02 10
The lamp is automatically switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
108
Automatic lighting
Using the switch (2), see page 107, three posi- tions can be selected for the lighting the pas- senger compartment:
Off right-hand side (marked with 0) depressed, automatic lighting switched off.
Neutral position automatic lighting acti- vated. The dimmer function is active.
On left-hand side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.
Neutral position
When the switch (2) is in neutral position pas- senger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the below.
The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade.
the engine is stopped and the remote con- trol key is turned to position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:
the engine is started
the car is locked with the key or remote control key.
Passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off auto- matically after 5 minutes.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
109
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
110
Storage spaces
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111
Storage compartment in door panel.
Coat hanger, only for light garments.
Storage pocket on front edge of front seat cushions.
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Storage compartment behind the centre console
Cup holder (with roller cover*)
Tunnel compartment (e.g. for CDs)
Cup holder (with roller cover*)
Storage compartment in rear side panel.
Storage pocket on rear of front seats.
WARNING
Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects lie or protrude in such a way that they could cause injury during heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Glovebox
G 02 42 08
The owner's manual and maps can be kept here for example. There are also holders for coins, pens and fuel cards.
The glovebox can be locked with the remote control key's detachable key blade. Further information is available on page 121.
Coat hanger
The coat hanger is located on the passenger seat head restraint. Only hang light garments on the hanger.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
112
Storage compartment in door panel
G 03 04 07
The storage compartment is opened by lifting the lower front edge of the lid, and closed with a touch on its upper section.
Storage compartment in rear side panel
G 02 08 07
The storage compartment is opened and closed with a touch in the centre of its upper section.
Storage under the front armrest
G 01 83 71
There is a storage space under the armrest. There is also a smaller storage space in the detachable armrest. Press the small button and lift the armrest to open the shallow com- partment. Press the large button and lift the armrest to open the deeper compartment.
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113
G 02 67 04
In the deeper compartment there is space for 10 normal CD cases. The cases must be stored vertically on the top edge for all 10 to have space.
Cup holder in centre console
G 01 83 72
There is space for a double cup holder under the roller cover. The space can be used for storage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at the rear edge of the cup holder where there is a recess.
If the cup holder is being fitted - first align its two guide lugs in the two recesses in the front edge of the space and then press down the rear edge of the cup holder.
The cup holder cannot be lifted out from cars which have alarm with movement detector*.
Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal objects in the cup holder as such objects could accidentally trigger the alarm*, see page 134.
Close the roller cover by gripping its front edge from below and pulling forward.
Storage compartment behind the handbrake
G 01 96 24
When there are no buttons for parking assis- tance and BLIS, see page 161 and page 164, the space can be used as a storage com- partment.
WARNING
Objects placed in this storage compartment must not obstruct the parking brake lever when it is applied.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
114
Cargo separator
G 02 08 45
The purpose of the separator is to limit the amount of the load in the cargo area so that the movement of the roof is not disrupted. Be sure to close the cargo separator fully so that it is locked on both the left and right-hand sides.
IMPORTANT
Do not place objects above or alongside the cargo separator when it is closed. Do not position luggage so that it is higher that the closed cargo separator.
G 02 08 47
Label on cargo separator.
NOTE
Too much load in the cargo area prevents the cargo separator from being closed. Consequently the roof is also prevented from opening.
Loading assistance
G 02 08 48
Button for raising and lowering the roof.
In open position the roof is folded up in the cargo area. The roof can be raised or lowered to facilitate loading and unloading using the button (see preceding illustration). The move- ments for loading assistance constitute a small amount of the normal movement of the roof. Consequently the messages for roof operation on the information display also apply to loading assistance, see page 104.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
115
WARNING
People or objects which prevent the raising and lowering of the roof are at risk of being trapped.
Using loading assistance
One press on the button both starts and stops raising/lowering. It may take several seconds before the movement starts. If a signal sounds when the button is pressed and the roof does not move, read the message on the information display.
1. Press the button to raise the roof.
2. Lift the cargo separator and move it into the cargo area.
3. When loading is complete, fold down the cargo separator.
4. Press the button so that the roof is low- ered.
NOTE
If the battery level is too low then the roof can only be lowered.
Using loading assistance with roof faults
If the message ROOF FAILURE SEE
MANUAL is shown on the information display then the roof can only be lowered.
1. Check that ROOF FAILURE SEE
MANUAL is shown on the display.
2. Keep the button depressed for approx. 5 seconds. Keep the button depressed while the roof is lowered.
A signal sounds during the whole lowering operation.
IMPORTANT
The cargo separator should be fully open before opening the roof.
When the roof is raised for loading assis- tance or if the movement is interrupted by pressing in the button twice then the boot lid must not be closed. This could result in damage and malfunction in the system.
Lower the roof to its lowest position, wait a few seconds and then close the boot lid.
Load retaining eyelets
G 02 08 50
There are four or more eyelets for securing straps or ropes. Straps that are suitable for the eyelets are supplied by Volvo dealers.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Electrical socket in cargo area
Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket. This socket works regardless of whether or not the ignition is on.
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car's battery.
Ski hatch
G 02 10 37
There is a hatch behind the centre panel1 in the rear seat backrest for transporting long, light objects.
Max. length: 2 m and max. weight: 25 kg. The ski hatch is opened from two directions, from the centre panel and from inside the cargo area.
Open the centre section in the back of
the rear seat
Pull the strap in the top of the backrest centre section to access the hatch.
Close the centre section in the back of
the rear seat
1. Refit the centre section with the lower part first.
2. Fold in the centre section and press until a clicking sound is heard.
Hatch in cargo area
If the car is equipped with ski bag* then the zip in the bag must also be opened from the pas- senger compartment.
Press the buttons in the two holes in the hatch towards each other and open the hatch.
Secure long loads with the seatbelt
Long loads, for example skis, must be secured with the rear seat's seatbelt.
Wrap the seatbelt one turn around the skis and lock it in the normal way in the seatbelt buckle.
If the car is equipped with a ski bag* then the belt must be threaded through its handle.
1 Emergency puncture repair kit, first aid and towing eye are stored in the centre panel in the rear seat backrest. For cars with spare wheel*, see page 188.
04 Interior
Cargo area
04
117
WARNING
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg. Always secure the load. Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may other- wise shift, causing personal injury to the car's occupants.
118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key with key blade....................................................... 120 Active locks........................................................................................... 123 Privacy locking*..................................................................................... 124 Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 126 Battery in remote control key................................................................ 129 Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 130 Alarm*.................................................................................................... 134
LOCKS AND ALARM
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
05
120
Remote control key
The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys.
The remote control keys contain detachable metal key blades for mechanical locking/ unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox.
The key blades' unique code is available at authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec- ommended for ordering new key blades.
A maximum of 6 remote control keys/key blades can be programmed and used for one single car.
Turn signal indication during locking/ unlocking
When the car is unlocked using the remote control key or Keyless drive system, two short flashes of the direction indicators serve to indi- cate that unlocking was correctly performed.
For locking, the indication takes place with one long flash and only if all locks have been locked, after the doors and the boot lid have been closed.
Personal preferences in the menu system can be used to the deactivate indication via the direction indicators. There will then be no visual indication as to whether the lock status is cor- rect, see page 78.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key, take the car and the other remote control keys to a Volvo workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure.
Immobiliser
The remote control keys are fitted with coded chips. The code must be accepted by the reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The engine can only be started if the correct remote control key with the correct code is used.
Remote control key functions
G 01 94 02
Locking - Locks the doors and boot lid. The remote control key does not lock the glovebox - it can only be locked with the key blade.
Unlocking Unlocks the doors and the boot lid. The remote control key does not unlock the glovebox - it can only be unlocked with the key blade. Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also open the side windows.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121
Approach lighting Switches on the light- ing at a distance lights up the area around a car parked in a dark location. Press the button once to switch on the interior light- ing, position/parking lamps, number plate lighting and door mirror lamps (option). The lighting is switched off automatically after 30, 60 or 90 seconds. For information on setting the delay time, see page 78.
Boot lid - Press the button once to unlock the boot lid only1.
Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the red button for at least 3 seconds or press i t twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The alarm can be deactivated with the same button, after having been armed for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 30 sec- onds.
IMPORTANT
The narrow section of the remote control key is particularly sensitive - this contains the chip. The engine cannot be started if the chip is damaged.
Detachable key blade
G 01 94 03
Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:
the driver's door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see page 127.
access to the glovebox and cargo area (privacy locking) is blocked, see pages 122 and 124.
the boot lid can be opened manually if the car is de-energised, see page 130.
PACOS* activated/deactivated, see page 22.
Removing the key blade
To remove the key blade from the remote con- trol key:
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
Pull out the key blade at the same time.
Attaching the key blade
Be careful when inserting the key blade into the remote control key.
1. Hold the remote control key with the nar- row end pointing down and lower the key blade into its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it in position. You should hear a "click".
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- charged, then the driver's door can be unlocked and opened as follows:
1. Insert the key blade in the driver's door keyhole.
2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise and open the door.
See also the figure and further information on page 127.
1 The function unlocks the boot lid it does not open.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
05
122
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 135.
Locking the glovebox
G 02 00 34
The glovebox is locked.
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked using the remote control key's detachable key blade. (For information on the key blade, see page 121.)
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position.
Pull out the key blade.
Unlocking takes place in reverse order.
For information on privacy locking, see page 124.
NOTE
The remote control key cannot unlock the glovebox without the key blade.
This function is particularly useful for when the car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.
05 Locks and alarm
Active locks
05
123
Active locks for remote control key with
key blade.
Active locks for remote control key with-
out key blade. For a description of the different storage areas, see page 110.
05 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
05
124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on privacy locking
The privacy locking function is intended for when the car is left for service, with a hotel parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then locked and the boot lid lock is disconnected from the central locking - the cargo area cannot be opened with either the central locking but- tons on the doors or the remote control key.
This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate/deacti- vate the alarm, to open the doors and to drive the car.
The remote control key without key blade can then be handed over to the service or hotel staff - the loose key blade is retained by the car owner.
Activate privacy locking
G 02 00 32
Privacy locking activated.
1. The folding roof must be closed.
NOTE
When opening/closing the folding roof there is the option to temporarily access the con- tents in the cargo area.
2. Open the boot lid and fold up the cargo separator; at which operation of the folding roof is blocked, see page 114.
3. Close the boot lid.
NOTE
The information display will show CLOSE BOOT SEP. FOR ROOF OPERAT..
4. Remove the detachable key blade from the remote control key, see page 121.
5. Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.
6. Turn the key blade 180 degrees clock- wise. The keyhole is vertical in the locked position for privacy locking.
7. Pull out the key blade.
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control key - keep it in a safe place.
The glovebox is then locked and the boot lid can no longer be unlocked with the remote control key or the central locking button.
Deactivate privacy locking
To reconnect the boot lid to the central locking automatic function, proceed as follows:
1. Insert the remote control key's detachable key blade into the glovebox keyhole and turn 180 degrees anticlockwise.
05 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125
2. Refit the key blade into the remote control key, see page 121.
3. Open the boot lid and fold down the cargo separator which blocked the operation of the folding roof - the information display text about the cargo separator is then cleared.
4. Close the boot lid.
Following which, the glovebox is unlocked and all central locking functions are again con- trolled by the remote control key and the cen- tral locking buttons on the doors.
For information on locking the glovebox only, see page 122.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless lock and ignition system
G 01 94 18
The keyless drive system allows the car to be unlocked, driven and locked without the need for a key. You simply need to have the remote control key with you in a pocket or a bag.
The system makes it easier and more conven- ient to open the car, for example with shopping bags in one hand and a child in the other. It saves you having to take out or look for the remote control key.
The two remote control keys incorporate the keyless drive function. You can order addi- tional remote controls. The keyless drive sys- tem can handle up to six remote controls.
Remote control key max. 1.5 m from the
car
In order to open a door or the boot lid, a remote control key must be no more than approx. 1.5 m from the car door handle or boot lid.
This means that the person who wishes to open a door must have the remote control key with him or her. It is not possible to open a door if the remote control key is on the other side of the car.
The grey area in the illustration indicates the range covered by the system's antennas.
If someone leaves the car and takes a keyless drive remote control key with them, a warning message appears on the information display and a reminder signal sounds. The warning message disappears when the remote control key is brought back to the car or when the igni- tion dial is turned to position 0. The warning is only issued if the ignition dial is in position I or II after someone has opened and closed a door.
The warning message and reminder signal dis- appear when the remote control key is brought back to the car after one of the following actions:
a door has been opened and closed
the ignition dial has been turned to position 0
the READ button has been pressed.
Never leave any remote control key in the
car
If a remote control key with keyless drive func- tion is left in the car, it is made passive when the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.
If someone breaks into the car and finds the remote control key, it can be activated and used again. It is therefore important to handle all remote control keys with equal care.
Interference to remote control key
function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter- fere with the keyless drive system.
NOTE
Do not place/store the remote control key near a mobile phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the remote control key and key blade in the normal way, see page 120.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127
Locking
G 02 00 33
Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles.
When the remote control key is within the range covered by the system's antennas, the doors and the boot lid are locked as follows:
Push in the lock button on one of the door handles.
All doors must be closed before the lock button is pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock.
When the car is locked, the lock buttons on the inside of the doors retract.
An LED on the inside of the door in question illuminates, see page 131.
NOTE
On cars with the keyless drive system and automatic transmission the gear selector must be moved to the P position and the ignition dial turned to the 0 position. Other- wise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.
Unlocking
When the remote control key is within the range covered by the system's antennas:
1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant han- dle.
2. Open the boot lid by pressing under the boot lid opening button and lift the boot lid.
If for some reason the keyless drive function in the remote control key is not operating, the car can be unlocked using the remote control key functions, see page 120.
Power seat remote control key with
memory function
If several people with keyless drive remote control keys get into the car, then the driver's seat will be adjusted for the person who opens the door first.
Unlocking doors with the key blade
G 02 02 25
If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- charged, then the driver's door can be opened as follows:
1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize out the plastic cover in the handle by inserting the key blade in the hole on the bottom of the cover.
2. Unlock the door using the key blade.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
05
128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 135.
Antenna location
G 02 00 77
The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, inside centre
Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor
Door handle, left
Centre console, under the rear section
Door handle, right
Centre console, under the front section
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.
Personal preferences
The Keyless Drive system can have personal preferences applied, see page 78.
05 Locks and alarm
Battery in remote control key
05
129
Low battery in remote control key
When the battery runs down and full function- ality cannot be guaranteed, the information symbol and display show KEY BATTERY
LOW VOLTAGE or REMOTE BATTERY
LOW VOLTAGE.
Changing the remote control key battery
G 01 94 06
If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signals from the remote control key at a normal dis- tance, the battery should be replaced (type CR 2450, 3 V).
1. Place the remote control key with the key- pad downward and prize up the cover using a small screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and () sides are fitted (there is a diagram under the cover).
4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoid touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers.
5. Refit the cover and press it in. > Dispose of the old battery in an environ-
mentally-responsible manner.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
130
Locking/unlocking the car from outside
For cars with the Keyless system, see page 126.
Unlocking
Using the remote control key's unlock button the car can be unlocked in two different ways (select in personal settings, see page 78):
One press unlocks the doors and the boot lid
One press unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the boot lid.
Locking
The remote control key's lock button locks the doors and boot lid simultaneously.
NOTE
The car can be locked even if the boot lid is open - when the boot lid is then closed there is a risk that the keys will be locked in.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key - it is then not pos- sible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls. Read more about this in the section "Deadlocks" later on.
Boot lid
Unlocking
Unlocking boot lid only:
Press the remote control key's button to unlock the boot lid.
Locking
If the doors are locked when the boot lid is closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with the remote control key's lock button or from inside to lock both doors and the boot lid.
Opening the boot lid mechanically
G 01 63 34
If the car's electrical systems are temporarily out of order then the boot lid can be opened mechanically with the remote control key's detachable key blade. For information on removing the key blade, see page 121.
1. Fold forward the left-hand seat's backrest to access the keyhole down at the floor.
2. Fold up the tab that covers the keyhole. 3. Insert the key blade and turn it 110 degrees
clockwise.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
131
IMPORTANT
The roof must be fully closed or fully open before mechanical opening can be used for the boot lid.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically (does not apply to locking from inside). This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see page 135.)
Locking/unlocking the car from inside
G 02 08 65
With the central locking buttons on the doors, the doors and boot lid can be locked or unlocked simultaneously.
Unlocking
Press the upper section of the central lock- ing button .
Locking
Press the lower section of the central lock- ing button .
Opening the doors
When the doors are locked from the inside:
Pull the handle twice to unlock and open the door.
Lock indicator
G 02 08 67
A light on the inside of the door in question illu- minates for approx. 5 minutes after the car has been locked with the remote control key's lock button, or with the Keyless drive system when the engine is switched off, see page 126.
When the car is locked from the inside the LEDs acknowledge the locking with one long flash. Unlocking from the inside is acknowl- edged by 2 short flashes.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Automatic locking
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the doors and boot lid are locked automatically.
When the function is activated and the doors have been locked they can be opened in two ways:
Pull one of the door handles twice
Press the upper section of the central lock- ing button and pull the door handle.
The function can be activated/deactivated by means of personal preferences, see page 78.
Deadlocks*
Deadlocks means that the lock buttons and door handles are mechanically disengaged, which prevents opening from the inside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and are set after a 10-25 second delay after the doors have been locked.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The driver's door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Temporary deactivation
If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off.
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Display
MENU
EXIT
ENTER
Navigation
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133
Deactivation is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system under CAR
SETTINGS (for a detailed description of the menu system, see page 78).
2. Select REDUCED GUARD.
3. Select Activate once: The instrument panel display shows the message REDUCED GUARD SEE MANUAL and the deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is turned to position 0 the audio system dis- play shows the message Reduced guard
ask on exit Press ENTER to reduce
guard until engine is started Press EXIT
to cancel - select one of the options:
NOTE
If the car is equipped with an alarm:
Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.
If the deadlocks function shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car. If the car is equipped with an alarm with move-
ment and tilt detectors* then these are switched off at the same time, see page 135.
The next time the remote control key is turned to key position II the system is reset to zero and the instrument panel display shows the mes- sage FULL GUARD at which the deadlocks function and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are re-engaged.
or
If the locking system shall not be changed: Select no options at all and lock the car. Or press EXIT and lock the car.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Alarm system
When the alarm is armed, it continually moni- tors all alarm inputs.
The alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or boot lid is opened
a non-approved key is used in the ignition or if an attempt is made to force the lock
a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector)
the battery's cable is disconnected
anyone tries to disconnect the siren.
NOTE
When the roof is closed, the alarm functions in the same way as when it is open, i.e. movement detected in the passenger com- partment triggers an alarm.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm is located under the cup holder in the centre console. This detector is sensitive for metals.
Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal objects in the centre console's cup holder as such objects could accidentally trigger the alarm.
Alarm indicator
G 02 02 27
A red LED on the top of the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:
LED not lit the alarm is not armed.
The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed.
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and until key position II is activated the alarm has been triggered.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message appears on the display. At which point you should contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.
Arming the alarm
Press the remote control key lock button. A long flash from the car's direction indi- cators confirms that the alarm is armed and that the doors are locked.
IMPORTANT
The alarm is fully armed when the car's direction indicators have made one long flash and the LED on the instrument panel flashes once every other second.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135
Disarming the alarm
Press the remote control key unlock but- ton. Two short flashes from the car's direc- tion indicators confirm that the alarm is disarmed and that the doors are unlocked.
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the boot lid is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Press the unlock button on the remote control key or insert the key in the ignition switch.
Confirmation is given by two short flashes from the direction indicators.
If the remote control key's batteries are dis- charged then the alarm can be deactivated by unlocking the driver's door manually, inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch and turning it to key position II.
Remote control key not working
G 01 94 20
If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is discharged - the car can be unlocked, dis- armed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade. The alarm is triggered and the siren sounds.
2. On cars with the keyless drive system: First remove the knob by pressing in the catch (1) and pulling out (2).
3. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch (3). The alarm is deactivated. The alarm light flashes rapidly until the remote control key is turned to key position II.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following hap- pens:
A siren sounds for 25 seconds or until the alarm is deactivated. The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car battery.
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry - the move- ment and tilt detectors should be temporarily deactivated.
The procedure is the same as with the tempo- rary disengaging of deadlocks - see page 132
Testing the alarm system
Testing the movement detector* in the
passenger compartment
1. Open all the windows.
2. Engage the alarm function with the remote control key's lock button. Active alarm function is confirmed with a slowly flashing alarm indicator.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
05
136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. Test the movement detector by lifting out a bag from a seat for example. > A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.
Test of alarm for doors
1. Engage the alarm function with the remote control key's lock button.
2. Please wait 30 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door with the detacha- ble key blade.
4. Open one of the doors. > A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.
Test of alarm for bonnet
1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement detector, see the previous section "Reduced alarm level".
2. Remain sitting in the car and engage the alarm function with the remote control key's lock button.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the dashboard. > A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.
05 Locks and alarm
05
137
138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 140 Refuelling.............................................................................................. 142 Alcolock*............................................................................................... 146 Starting the engine................................................................................ 150 Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 152 Manual gearbox.................................................................................... 153 Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 154 Brake system........................................................................................ 157 DSTC Stability and traction control system*...................................... 159 Park Assist*........................................................................................... 161 BLIS* Blind Spot Information System................................................ 163 Towing and recovery............................................................................. 166 Start assistance.................................................................................... 169 Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 170 Towing equipment*............................................................................... 172 Detachable towbar* ............................................................................. 174 Loading................................................................................................. 178 Adjusting headlamp pattern.................................................................. 179
STARTING AND DRIVING
06 Starting and driving
General
06
140
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and road - lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption.
Avoid driving with open windows.
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking.
Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the fuel con- sumption.
Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use.
Do not run the engine to operating tem- perature at idling speed, but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible - a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.
For more information and further advice, see the pages 13 and 278.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maxi- mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
In greater depths, water can enter the trans- mission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of the systems.
When driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.
Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.
IMPORTANT
Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time. This could cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of stalling in water, do not try to restart. Tow the car from the water.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For supplementary information about over- heating when driving with a trailer - see page 170.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.
In the event of a risk of overheating a built- in protection function in the gearbox is acti- vated which, amongst other things, illumi- nates the instrument panel's yellow infor- mation lamp and there is a text message displayed there regarding appropriate action - follow the recommendation given.
06 Starting and driving
General
06
141
If the temperature gauge for the engine's cooling system goes into the red zone - stop and let the engine idle for a few minutes.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a while after the engine has been switched off.
Diesel engine
When driving under heavy load in a hot climate, the engine cooling fan can be replaced with one of a greater capacity than the standard model1. Check with your nearest Volvo dealer regarding the options for your car.
Open boot lid
WARNING
Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car through the cargo area.
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the bat- tery to varying degrees. Avoid having the remote control key in key position II when the engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less power.
Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo area supplies power even when the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are:
ventilation fan
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume)
headlamps.
If the battery voltage is low the information dis- play shows the text LOW BATTERY POWER
SAVE MODE. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the battery by star- ting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes - battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
1 For certain engines.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
142
Opening the fuel filler flap
Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heater before refuelling!
Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the lighting panel, see page 58. The engine must be switched off before the flap can be opened. The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing.
Closing
Push in the flap until you hear a click.
Opening from the cargo area
G 02 09 51
Manual opening of the fuel filler flap is easier when the roof is closed, and is used when it is not possible to open it from the passenger compartment.
1. Remove the cover over the lamp housing on the right-hand side of the cargo area.
2. Pull the wire hanging on the hook.
3. When the fuel filler flap has opened, refit the wire and cover.
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock.
Fuel cap
1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resis- tance is felt.
2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to a stop.
3. Take out the cap.
4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
NOTE
Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling. Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.
Filling up with fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.
Fuel of a lower quality than that specified should not be used as engine power and fuel consumption could be negatively affected, for more information see the following section Fuel.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
143
General information on fuel
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get- ting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swal- lowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills on to the ground can be ignited by the exhaust fumes.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's guarantees, and any associated service agreement. This applies to all engines. NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
For information on fuel consumption, CO2
emissions and tank volume - see page 278.
Catalytic converter
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of exhaust gases close to the engine so that it quickly reaches operating temperature. The catalytic converter consists of a monolith (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho- dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem- ical reaction without being used up them- selves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that con-
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion of harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous oxides) using the three-way cata- lytic converter.
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 91, 95 and 98 RON.
91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder engines and should only be used in excep- tional cases with other engines.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
144
Diesel
Diesel must meet the EN 590 or JIS K2204 standards.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used: special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel oil, RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use diesel of dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-40 C to -6 C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem- peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre- cipitate.
IMPORTANT
Use special winter grade fuel during cold months.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- gent and water.
IMPORTANT
The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star- vation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Do this before starting the
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and turn to key position II (see page 150).
2. Wait approx. 1 minute. 3. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal, and turn the remote control key to start position III.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera- tion.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle fil- ter, which results in more efficient emission control. The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. So-
1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automat- ically and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.
The rear window heating may be activated automatically to increase the load on the engine during regeneration without warning.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately 80% full of particles, the yellow information symbol on the instrument panel illuminates, and the message SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL is shown on the instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature, preferably on a main road or motor- way. The car should then be driven for approx- imately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the message is cleared automatically.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up it may be incapable of functioning. Then it can be difficult to start the engine and there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating tempera- ture more quickly.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on the Alcolock
The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.
Functions
1. Nozzle for breath test. 2. Switch. 3. Transmission button. 4. Lamp for battery status. 5. Lamp for result of breath test. 6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
Operation
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta- tus:
Indicator lamp (4)
Battery status
Green flashing Charging in pro- gress
Green Fully charged
Yellow Semi-charged
Red Discharged - fit the charger in the holder or connect the power supply cable from the glovebox.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will keep the built-in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened.
1 Also called Alcoguard.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If the Alcolock is outside the car when it is unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a "click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath
test. 4. If no message is shown then the transmis-
sion to the car may have failed - in which case, press the button (3) to transmit the result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it must be repeated.
Result after breath test
Indicator lamp (5) + Display text
Specification
Green lamp + ALCOGUARD
APPROVED TEST
Start the engine - no alcohol content measured.
Yellow lamp + ALCOGUARD
APPROVED TEST
Engine starting pos- sible - measured alcohol content is above 0.1 promille but below the limit value in forceA.
Red lamp + DISAP-
PROVED TEST
WAIT 1 MINUTE
Engine starting not possible - measured alcohol content is above the limit value in forceA.
A Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply. See also the section entitled General information on the Alcolock on page146.
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accu- rate a measurement result as possible:
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is car- ried out in the event of a change of driver - depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine.
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop2 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the display shows ALCOGUARD CALIBR.
REQUIRED. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine star- ting will be blocked - only starting with the
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Bypass function will then be possible, see page 148 section Emergency situation.
The message can be cleared by pressing the send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap- pears each time the engine is started - only recalibration at a workshop2 can clear the mes- sage permanently.
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (C) Maximum heat- ing time (sec-
onds)
+10 to +85 10
-5 to +10 60
-40 to -5 180
At temperatures below -20 C or above +60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply. The display shows ALCOGUARD
INSERT POWER CABLE. In which case, con- nect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.
In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation or the Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory, see page 10 in the section, Recording data.
After the Bypass function has been activated the display shows ALCOGUARD BYPASS
ENABLED the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a workshop2.
The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged - in which case, carry out all the steps without starting the car. The error message is cleared when the car is locked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option. This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop2.
Activating the Bypass function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows BYPASS ACTIVATED WAIT 1 MINUTE
and then ALCOGUARD BYPASS
ENABLED - after which the engine can be started.
This function can be activated several times. The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop2.
Activating the Emergency function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the display shows ALCOGUARD BYPASS ENABLED and the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a reset must be made at a workshop2.
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149
Symbols and display messages
In addition to the previously described mes- sages, the combined instrument panel's dis- play can also show the following:
Display text Meaning/Action
ALCOGUARD
RESTART POSSI-
BLE
The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes - engine starting pos- sible without new test.
ALCOGUARD
SERVICE
REQUIRED
Contact a work- shop2.
ALCOGUARD NO
SIGNAL
Transmission failed - send manually with button (3) or take a new breath test.
ALCOGUARD
INVALID TEST
Test failed - take a new breath test.
ALCOGUARD
BLOW LONGER
Blowing too short - blow for longer.
ALCOGUARD
BLOW SOFTER
Blowing too hard - blow more gently.
Display text Meaning/Action
ALCOGUARD
BLOW HARDER
Blowing too weak - blow harder.
ALCOGUARD
WAIT PREHEAT-
ING
Heating not finished - wait for text ALCOGUARD
BLOW 5 SEC-
ONDS.
2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
06
150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Before starting the engine
Apply the parking brake.
Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started, see page 146.
Automatic gearbox
Move the gear selector in position P or N.
Manual gearbox
Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch pedal fully depressed. This is particularly important in very cold conditions.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock could otherwise be activated, making it impossi- ble to steer the car.
The remote control key must be in key posi- tion II when the car is being towed.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is in order that the emis- sions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.
Starting the engine
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.
Petrol
Turn the remote control key to key position III. If the engine does not start within 510 seconds, release the key and try again.
Diesel
1. Turn the remote control key to key position II. > An indicator symbol in the combined
instrument panel shows that engine pre- heating is underway, see page 51.
2. Turn the ignition key to position III when the indicator symbol goes out.
Autostart *
With the autostart function, there is no need to hold the remote control key (or ignition dial, on cars with Keyless Drive - see page 126) in key position III until the engine has started.
Turn the key to key position III and release it - the starter motor then works automati- cally until the engine has started.
NOTE
If the diesel engine is started in extreme cold without waiting for engine preheating, then the automatic start sequence can be delayed for a couple of seconds.
Key positions
0 Locked position
The steering lock is activated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
06
151
I Radio position
Steering lock deactivated. Certain functions can be used. The engine's electrical system is not activated.
II Driving position
The remote control key's position when driving. The whole electrical system is engaged.
III Start position
The starter motor is activated. The remote control key is released when the engine has started and then springs back to drive position.
A ticking sound can be heard if the key reaches an intermediate position - in which case, turn the key to position II and back to get rid of the sound.
When the steering lock is activated
If the front wheels are positioned so that there is tension in the steering lock then the infor- mation display may show a warning message
and the car cannot be started. In which case, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch and turn the steering wheel so that the tension is released.
2. Hold the steering wheel in this position. Reinsert the key and make a new attempt to start the car.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock would be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, especially if there are children in the car.
Remote control keys and electronic immobiliser
The remote control key must not hang with other keys or metal objects on the same key ring. The electronic immobiliser could be acti- vated accidentally.
06 Starting and driving
Keyless drive*
06
152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G 01 94 10
The keyless drive system allows the car to be unlocked, driven and locked without the need for a key, see page 126.
The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the same way as the remote control key. One pre- condition for starting the car is that the car's remote control key is located inside the pas- senger compartment or the cargo area.
Starting the car
Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manual gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with auto- matic gearbox).
Petrol engine
Press in and turn the ignition dial to key position III.
Diesel engine
1. First turn the ignition dial to key position II and wait until the diesel indicator symbol in the combined instrument panel goes out, see page 51.
2. Following which, turn the ignition dial to position III.
Starting with the remote control key
G 01 94 20
If the remote control key's battery is dis- charged then the Keyless Drive function does not work. In which case, start the car by using the remote control key as ignition dial.
1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.
2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignition switch.
3. Insert the remote control key into the igni- tion switch and start in the same way as with the ignition dial.
06 Starting and driving
Manual gearbox
06
153
Gear positions
Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
The 6-speed box is available in two versions - reverse gear position differs between them. Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying the parking brake when parking on a slope - an engaged gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil- ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.
Start from neutral position N and only engage reverse gear R when the car is sta- tionary.
NOTE
With the upper variant of the shifting pattern for 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustra- tion) - first press down the gear lever in the N position in order to engage reverse gear.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
154
Geartronic automatic gear positions
G 01 82 64
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear positions.
The information display shows the position of the gear selector using the following indica- tions: P, R, N, D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see page 49.
P Parking position
Select position P when you wish to start the engine or park the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position P is selected.
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed in order to be able to disengage the gear lever from the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Always apply the parking brake when parking the car.
WARNING
Get into the habit of always applying the parking brake when parking on a slope - the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
R Reverse
The car must be stationary when position R is selected.
N Neutral
No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake when the car is stationary with the gear selector in posi- tion N.
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed in order to be able to disengage the gear lever from the N position if the car has been stationary for more than 3 seconds.
D Drive
D is the normal driving position. The car auto- matically shifts up and down depending on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R.
Geartronic manual gear positions (+/-)
The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at +/. The information display shifts the indication from D to one of the figures 1 6, which is equivalent to the gear that is engaged just then, see page 49.
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release it, the lever returns to its rest position between + and .
or
Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode (+/) can be selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
155
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
Move the lever to the side to the end posi- tion at D.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick- down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func- tion.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G 02 02 37
The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
Cars with an automatic gearbox have special safety systems:
Keylock
To remove the remote control key, the gear selector must be in the P position. The key is locked in all other positions.
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Hold your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another posi- tion.
Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking
position (P position)
To be able to move the gear selector from the P position to other gear positions, the remote control key must be in position II and the brake pedal must be depressed.
Shiftlock Neutral (N position)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least three sec- onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run- ning) then the gear selector is locked in the N position.
To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote con- trol key must be in position II.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
06
156
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor
G 01 82 63
In certain cases, it may be necessary to move the car when it is not driveable, for example if the battery is flat. Proceed as follows to move the car:
1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D on the gear selector panel. Open it at the rear edge.
2. Fully insert the key blade from the remote control key.
3. Hold the key blade down and at the same time move the gear lever out of the P posi- tion.
Cold start
When starting in low temperatures, the gear changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera- tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear- box shifts up later than normal when the engine is started at low temperatures.
NOTE
Depending on the engine temperature when the engine is started, the idle speed after a cold start may be higher than normal for certain engine types.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
157
Brake servo
If the car is rolling or is being towed with the engine turned off, the brake pedal must be depressed about 5 times harder than when the engine is running. If the brake pedal is depressed when the engine is started, you will feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to the brake servo becoming active. This may be more noticeable if the car has Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA).
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine is running.
NOTE
If braking with the engine switched off, press the brake pedal sharply once, not repeatedly.
Brake circuits
This symbol illuminates if a brake circuit is not working.
If a fault should occur in one of the circuits, it is still possible to brake
the car. The brake pedal will travel further and may feel softer than normal. Harder pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect.
Dampness can affect braking
characteristics
Brake components become wet when the car is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water or when the car is washed. This may alter brake pad friction characteristics so that there is a delay before braking effect is noticed.
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy snow, as well as after setting off in very damp or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads and dries off any water. This precaution is also recommended before parking the car for a long period in such weather conditions.
If the brakes are used heavily
When driving in the Alps or other roads with similar characteristics, the car's brakes are heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not being depressed especially hard.
Because speed is often low, the brakes are not cooled as effectively as when driving on flat roads at higher speed.
So as not to overload the brakes, shift down when driving downhill instead of using the foot brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as you would use driving uphill. This uses engine braking more efficiently so the foot brake is only required for brief periods.
Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an additional load on the car's brakes.
Anti-lock braking system - ABS
The anti-lock braking system (ABS) prevents the wheels from locking up during braking.
This means the ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example.
After the engine has been started, the ABS will perform a brief self-test at a speed of about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as pulses in the brake pedal.
To get the most out of the ABS:
1. Depress the brake pedal with full force. Pulses will be felt.
2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do not release the pressure on the pedal.
Practice braking with the ABS system in a traf- fic-free area and in different weather condi- tions.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
158
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA
For sudden braking, EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) provides full-strength braking instanta- neously. The EBA function senses when heavy braking is underway by registering how quickly the brake pedal is depressed.
Continue braking without easing off on the brake pedal. The function disengages when the pressure on the brake pedal eases.
This function is always active. It cannot be dis- engaged.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu- minate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake system. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is working and/or in the event of sudden braking. After the car's speed has been slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow - while at the same time the hazard warning flashers are activated, and they flash until the driver changes engine speed with the accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with their button, see page 69.
06 Starting and driving
DSTC Stability and traction control system*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159
General
The stability and traction control system, DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.
A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking or acceleration when the system is in action. The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during accel- eration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and trans- fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- ning to the one that is not.
Reduced operation
G 02 90 57
Controls and information display.
Thumbwheel1
RESET button1
The stability system is activated automatically each time the car is started.
System operation during skidding and accel- eration can be partially deactivated. Operation during skidding is then delayed and so allows more skidding which provides greater freedom for dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is improved at the same time as acceler- ation is no longer limited.
Operation
1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC menu appears.
DSTC ON means that the system function is unchanged.
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that system operation is reduced.
2. Press and hold the RESET button until the DSTC menu is changed.
The system remains reduced until the driver reactivates it or until the engine is switched off - after the engine is started the next time DSTC is back in its normal mode again.
WARNING
Suppressing system function may alter the driving characteristics of the car.
NOTE
DSTC ON is shown for several seconds on the display each time the engine is started.
1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
06 Starting and driving
DSTC Stability and traction control system*
06
160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Messages on the information display
TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF means that the system has been tempo- rarily reduced due to excessive brake tempera- ture.
The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system disabled due to a fault.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine. > If the message remains when the engine
is restarted, drive to a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Symbols in the combined instrument panel
DSTC system
Information
If the symbols and are displayed at the same time:
Read the message on the information dis- play.
If the symbol appears alone then it may appear as follows:
Flashing light means that the DSTC system is now being activated.
Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys- tem check when the engine is started.
Constant glow after starting the engine or while driving means that there is a fault in the DSTC system.
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161
General information on parking assistance
Parking assistance front and rear.
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. A signal indicates the distance to a detected obstacle.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking. The sensors have blind spots where obsta- cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- dren or animals near the car.
Variants
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
Rear only.
Both front and rear.
Function
The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. If the volume of another audio source from the audio system is high, then this is automatically lowered.
The tone becomes constant at a distance of about 30 cm. If there are obstacles within this distance both behind and in front of the car, the signal alternates between left and right-hand speakers.
Rear parking assistance only
The system is automatically engaged when the car is started.
Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged and the message Park
Assist active EXIT to deactivate is shown on the audio system's display.
If the system is switched off, the display shows Park Assist deactivated ENTER to
activate as soon as reverse gear is engaged. To change the settings, see page 78.
The distance covered behind the car is about 1.5 metres. The signal comes from the rear loudspeakers.
Limitations
The system must be deactivated when revers- ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier would trigger the sensors.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
Parking assistance both front and rear
G 01 83 89
Button for Off/On (here rear button).
The system is automatically engaged when the car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
06
162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.
Front
Front parking assistance is active at speeds below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at higher speeds. When the speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated.
The distance covered to the front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles in front comes from the front loudspeakers.
Limitations
Front parking assistance cannot be combined with extra lights because the sensors are affec- ted by the extra lights.
Rear
Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged.
The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The signal for obstacles behind comes from the rear loudspeakers.
Limitations
See the previous section Rear parking assis- tance only.
Fault indicator
If the information symbol illumi- nates with constant glow and the display shows PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED then park- ing assistance is disengaged. For
attention, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Cleaning the sensors
Parking assistance sensors.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163
General
G 02 02 95
Rearview mirror with BLIS system.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.
BLIS is an information system that under cer- tain conditions can help to draw the driver's attention to vehicles moving in the same direc- tion in the so-called "blind spot".
The system is designed to work most effec- tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane highways.
BLIS is based on camera technology. The cam- eras (1) are located under the door mirrors.
When a camera has detected a vehicle inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illu- minates with a constant glow.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system. If for example the sys- tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown in the information display. In such cases, check and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system can be switched off temporarily by pressing the BLIS button see page 164.
Blind spots
A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m.
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at a speed above 10 km/h.
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle.
The system is designed to react if you are over- taken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h faster than your vehicle.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
06
164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of the surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
In darkness the system reacts to the head- lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with headlamps that are switched off are not detected by the system. This means for exam- ple that the system does not react to a trailer without headlamps which is towed behind a car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists or moped riders.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to those of the human eye, i.e. they do not see as well in e.g. heavy snowfall, strong oncoming light or thick fog.
Activate/deactivate
G 01 83 89
Button for Off/On (here front button).
BLIS is activated when the engine is started. The indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated by pressing the BLIS button.
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button goes out and a text message is shown on the instrument panel display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button illuminates, a new text message is shown on the display and the indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times. Press the READ but- ton to clear the text message. For more infor- mation on messages, see page 54.
BLIS system message
Text on the dis- play
Specification
BLIS ON The BLIS system is activated.
BLIS REDUCED
FUNCTION
Reduced function in data transmission between the BLIS system's camera and the car's electri- cal system.
The camera resets itself when the data transmission between the BLIS system's camera and the car's electri- cal system returns to normal.
BLIS CAMERA
BLOCKED
One or both cam- eras blocked - clean the lenses.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS* Blind Spot Information System
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165
Text on the dis- play
Specification
BLIS SERVICE
REQUIRED
Blind spot syst. dis- engaged - contact a workshop.
BLIS OFF The BLIS system is deactivated.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Cleaning
In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam- era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge. Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not scratched.
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text BLIS SERVICE REQUIRED.
Here are several examples of situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
G 01 81 77
Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.
Low sun in the camera.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
166
Start assistance
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start. Do not tow the car to bump start the engine, see page 169.
IMPORTANT
Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.
Towing
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before towing begins.
1. Turn the remote control key to position II and unlock the steering lock so that the car can be steered, see page 151.
2. The key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
The steering lock must be unlocked before towing - the lock stays in the position it was in when the voltage was disconnected.
The remote control key must be in key position II - in position I all airbags are deactivated.
Never remove the key from the ignition switch when the car is being towed.
NOTE
If the car is de-energised then the steering lock must be unlocked using a donor bat- tery before towing can be started.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
Prior to towing:
Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than 80 km.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.
Fitting the towing eye
Take out the towing eye (1) that is stored in the puncture repair kit's packaging* behind the ski hatch or together with the spare wheel.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways:
Open the variant with a recess using a coin or similar inserted in the recess, turning it outwards. Then turn out the cover completely and remove it.
The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press the mark- ing with a finger and fold out the oppo- site side/corner at the same time using a coin or similar - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
06
168
NOTE
On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store the towbar's towball in the car, see page 172.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
IMPORTANT
Cars with automatic gearbox must only be towed with drive wheels raised from the road.
06 Starting and driving
Start assistance
06
169
Starting with a donor battery
If the battery is flat then the car can be started with current from another battery.
When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:
1. Turn the remote control key to key position 0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.
5. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive terminal (2).
6. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative ter- minal (3).
7. Fit the other clamp to a grounding point, such as by the left-hand spring strut (4).
8. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting procedure.
9. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
10. Start the engine in the car with the dis- charged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.
11. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - first the black and then the red. > Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
For more information on the car's battery - see page 217.
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
170
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see page 271.
If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorised Volvo workshop, then the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with a Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket follows the specified maximum towball load.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure decal location, see page 186.
Clean the towing bracket regularly and grease the towball1.
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Please wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.
For safety reasons, the maximum permit- ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.
Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see page 271.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.
Manual gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
If an engine starts to run too hot, the instru- ment panel will display a text message which recommends switching to a lower gear - follow the recommendation given.
In the event of a risk of overheating the optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 rpm for optimum circulation of the coolant.
1 Do not lubricate the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
06
171
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic transmission in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to parking position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake.
Block the wheels with chocks when park- ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- tion D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Towbar
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose sec- tion must be followed carefully, see page 174.
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:
Follow the installation instructions care- fully.
The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows green.
Important checks
The towbar's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.
Storing the towbar
G 03 11 13
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.
Trailer cable
G 01 45 89
An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173
Specifications
G 01 03 93 G 01 03 91
G 01 03 92
Dimensions for mounting points (mm)
A B C D E F G H I J K
Fixed or detachable towbar standard 1172 78 964 482 40 141 550 150 113 100 140
1 Side member
2 Ball centre
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fitting the towbar
G 01 73 17
1. Remove the protective cover by first press- ing in the catch and then pulling the cover straight back .
G 02 03 01
2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clock- wise.
G 02 03 02
3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows red. If the window does not show red, press in and turn the locking wheel anti- clockwise until you hear a click.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175
G 02 03 04
4. Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G 02 03 06
5. Check that the indicator window shows green.
G 02 03 07
6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi- tion. Remove the key from the lock.
G 02 03 09
7. Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 02 03 10
8. Safety cable.
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place.
Removing the towbar
G 02 03 01
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.
G 02 03 12
2. Push in the locking wheel and turn it anticlockwise until you hear a click.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177
G 02 03 14
3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see page 172.
G 01 73 18
4. Push on the protective cover.
06 Starting and driving
Loading
06
178
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed infor- mation on weights, see page 271.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
Loading the cargo area
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. The gear lever or gear selector can be knocked out of position by long loads, which could set the car in motion.
Place the load firmly against the backrest in front.
Put wide loads in the centre.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
Never load cargo above the backrest.
The protection provided by the inflatable curtain may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.
Always secure the load. During heavy brak- ing the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
06
179
Correct light pattern for left or right- hand traffic
G 02 03 17
Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.
Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using a control in each headlamp housing to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists.
The correct pattern will also better illuminate the verge.
Halogen headlamps
G 02 14 21
Left-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
Headlamps with Active Bending Lights
G 02 14 22
Left-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.
180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 182 Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 186 Warning triangle* and spare wheel * .................................................... 187 Changing wheels................................................................................... 190 Emergency puncture repair*................................................................. 192
WHEELS AND TYRES
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
182
Driving characteristics and tyres
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha- racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.
When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions, and preferably also the same make, are fitted to all four wheels. Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified on the tyre pressure label, see page 186.
Designation of dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example: 205/55R16 91 W.
205 Tyre width (mm)
55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
16 Rim diameter in inches (")
91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed (in this case 270 km/h).
Speed ratings
The car is approved as a whole, which means that dimensions and speed ratings must not differ from those specified on the vehicle reg- istration document. The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (both those with metal studs and those without). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h).
Remember that traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed class of the tyres.
Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is espe- cially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac- tured in week 15 of 2010.
Tyre age
All tyres older than six years should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged.
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
183
The reason for this is that tyres age and decom- pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected due to the tyre's constituent materials being broken down. In such a case the tyre should then not be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
The age of the tyre can be determined by the DOT marking, see previous illustration.
More even wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more even wear, see page 186. Driving style, tyre pres- sure, climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif- ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable dis- tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-
wards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos- sible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up, and not standing up.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
G 02 03 23
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km, so that the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe- cially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
184
recommended not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive cars.
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident.
Rims and wheel nuts
Only use wheel rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are included in the Volvo genuine accessories range.
Standard wheel nuts.
Bulge acorn wheel nuts.
There are two types of wheel nut, depending on whether the wheel rims are made of steel or aluminium.
1. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (1) to 110 Nm. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (2) to 130 Nm.
2. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
IMPORTANT
The wheel nuts (1) should be tightened to 110 Nm and (2) to 130 Nm respectively. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.
Steel rims standard wheel nuts (1)
Steel rims are normally mounted with the standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn vari- ety may also be used.
WARNING
Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims. The wheel could come loose.
Aluminium rims bulge acorn wheel nuts
(2)
Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with aluminium rims.
NOTE
These nuts may also be used with steel rims.
Locking wheel nuts
Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu- minium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking wheel nuts are used in combination with wheel covers, the locking wheel nut should be moun-
07 Wheels and tyres
General
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185
ted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwise the wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.
NOTE
Tighten the lockable wheel nuts to 110 Nm.
Spare wheel Temporary Spare*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos- sible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table, see page 280.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Summer and winter wheels
G 02 03 25
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
When summer and winter wheels are changed, see page 190, the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right. Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rota- tion marked with an arrow.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direc- tion throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only
be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa.
If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain, snow and slush out of the way are adversely affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).
Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth.
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
07
186
Recommended tyre pressure
G 02 09 55
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar shows which pressures the tyres should have at different load and speed conditions.
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre size
ECO pressure1
Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).
Checking the tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.
Even after several kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So air must not be released if the pressure is checked when the tyres are warm. While the pressure must be increased if it is too low.
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con- sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low can also result in the tyres overheating and disintegrating.
For information on the correct tyre pressure, refer to the tyre pressure table. The specified tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera- ture as the ambient temperature.)
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h the general tyre pressure for maximum load is recommended in order to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and steering characteristics.
1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel *
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187
Warning triangle
G 02 09 56
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle*. Place the warning triangle in a suita- ble place with regard to the traffic.
1. Undo the case containing the warning tri- angle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Take the warning triangle from the case.
2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are located in the spare wheel well.
Spare wheel* and jack *
The car's original jack*
The original jack must only be used for chang- ing wheels. The jack's thread should always be well greased. The jack* and wheel wrench* are located in a foam block in the cargo area.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel *
07
188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Spare wheel and tools
Spare wheel and tools. (Location, tools also for emergency puncture repair kit.)
The spare wheel* is supplied in a tyre bag that is located in the cargo area's spare wheel well. In the centre of the tyre is a black foam block containing jack* and wheel wrench. The ten- sioning strap for the bag is secured in two lash- ing eyes on the floor.
1. Undo the two tensioning straps that secure the tyre bag to the floor.
2. Unzip the tyre bag and take out the tools. 3. Lift the spare wheel from the bag.
Place the damaged wheel in the tyre bag and strap it down with the tensioning straps. Be
sure to follow the instructions on the spare wheel bag when it is refitted.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel *
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189
WARNING
The spare wheel bag contains impact pro- tection. The spare wheel must be inside the bag when it is stored in the car. Always fit the bag in the spare wheel well, with the text label upwards and so that the arrow is point- ing forwards in the car.
Tools - returning into place
Tools and jack* must be returned into place in the correct manner after use.
For cars equipped with spare wheel, the jack must be cranked so that it fits into the spare wheel.
For cars equipped with emergency punc- ture repair kit, the jack must be fully cranked together and returned into the foam block.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.
First aid*
A case with first aid equipment is located in the cargo area.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Removing wheels
G 02 03 31
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be changed at a busy location. Make sure that the car and jack are on a firm horizontal surface.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.
1. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel wrench* that are located under the carpet in the cargo area. If another jack is selected, see page 207.
2. Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by hand.
5. Loosen the wheel nuts -1 turn anticlock- wise with the wheel wrench.
G 02 03 32
Telescopic wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.
6. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess in the plastic cover at each point. Crank the foot of the jack down so it is pressed squarely on the ground. Check that the jack is seated cor- rectly in the intended jacking point, as illus- trated, and that the base is located directly under it.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
07
191
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the wheel.
Fitting the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is important that the wheel nuts are tightened properly.
Standard wheel nuts - tightening tor- que: 110 Nm
Domed wheel nuts - tightening torque: 130 Nm
Check the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.
Ensure that passengers wait with the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Emergency puncture repair, general information
The emergency puncture repair kit is used to seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expiration date and after use.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc- tured in the tread.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
12V sockets for the compressor are located by the centre console in the front, by the rear seat and in the cargo area*. Choose the electrical socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Overview
G 02 04 00
Decal, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193
Sealing punctured tyres
G 01 97 23
For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture repair kit.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle's stopper.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is 3.5 bar.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.
3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf- ficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure decal. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit.
7. Volvo recommends that you drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres- sure is too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Changing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle before the expiration date has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ- mentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Leave the container at a collection point for storing dangerous waste.
196
Cleaning................................................................................................ 198 Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 202 Rustproofing......................................................................................... 203
CAR CARE
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
198
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Use car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion.
IMPORTANT
Avoid rinsing the car with the roof lowered in order to avoid water entering the passen- ger compartment.
Do not park the car in direct sunlight. Washing a car with hot paintwork can cause permanent paintwork damage. Wash the car in a car wash with waste water separator.
Hose down the underbody thoroughly.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.
If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the car using a cold degreasing agent.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp when it has been switched on for a time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Removing bird droppings
Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. This discoloration can only be removed by a specialist.
Chromed wheels
IMPORTANT
Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke- warm water.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it can never replace a proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto- matic car wash cannot reach everywhere.
IMPORTANT
The roof must be closed for automatic car washes.
The antenna by the boot lid should be unscrewed before automatic car washing.
IMPORTANT
Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is also more sensitive when it is new. For this reason, handwashing is recommended dur- ing the first few months with a new car.
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
199
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts).
IMPORTANT
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. When using a pressure washer: Make sure that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components (such as glossy trim mouldings). When using such a cleaning agent the instruc- tions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rub- ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- essary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.
Electrically operated roof
If the roof is wet when opened then water will run into the passenger compartment. For this reason, wait until the water has run off before opening the roof.
Hatch cover
The hatch cover, see page 103 is sensitive to water and should therefore be dried with a cloth if it becomes wet. Clean with a slightly dampened rag.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq- uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations con- tain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paint- work. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo war- ranty.
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car wax, degreaser or similar on glass surfa-
ces as this could ruin their water-repellent properties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.
There is natural wear of the water-repellent coating.
NOTE
Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recom- mended in order to maintain the water- repellent properties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recom- mended by your Volvo dealer!
Treatment of stains on textile upholstery
and headliner
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.
Treatment of stains on leather
upholstery and leather on the top of the
instrument panel*
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free and is treated to preserve its original appear- ance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural charac- teristics. It is given a protective coating, but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the clean- ing and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating. After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend- ing more or less on the surface texture of the leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective cream once to four times per year (or more if
08 Car care
Cleaning
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail- able from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
Certain items of coloured clothing (for example, jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such prod- ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery and leather on the top of the
instrument panel*
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery and leather on the top of the
instrument panel*
Vacuuming is important prior to using leather care agents.
1. Pour a small amount of the protective cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use.
The leather has now been given improved pro- tection against stains and improved UV pro- tection.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects may damage the leather, (e.g. rings).
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois- tened sponge and neutral soap.
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plas- tic.
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and blood)
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5% ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as group I.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as group I.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers.
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.
08 Car care
Touching up paintwork
08
202
Paintwork
Paint is an important part of the car's rust- proofing and should therefore be checked reg- ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings and doors.
Colour code
Data plate.
Code for car colour
It is important that the correct colour is used. For product decal location, see page 268.
Stone chips and scratches
G 02 03 45
Before touching up paintwork, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.
Materials
Primer in a can
Spray can or touch-up pen1
Masking tape.
Minor stone chips and scratches
If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged colour coat, you can paint straight after cleaning the dam- aged area.
If the stone chip has penetrated to the
bare metal
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.
2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a brush once the primer is dry.
3. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.
4. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of lapping paste.
1 Follow the instructions contained in the touch-up pen's packaging.
08 Car care
Rustproofing
08
203
Inspection and maintenance
Your car has already received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resis- tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene- trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the members, cavities and closed sections.
Maintain the car's rustproofing.
Keep the car clean. Hose down the under- body. If using a pressure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur- faces.
Regularly check and touch-up the rust- proofing treatment as necessary.
The car's rustproofing does not normally require treatment for approximately 12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three- year intervals. If the car needs further treat- ment, Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance.
204
Volvo service......................................................................................... 206 Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 207 Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 208 Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 210 Wiper blades......................................................................................... 216 Battery................................................................................................... 217 Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 219 Fuses..................................................................................................... 225
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service 09
206
Volvo service programme
Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly test driven. It was checked again in accord- ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations before it was handed over to you.
To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos- sible, follow the Volvo service programme specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo also recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo work- shops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest qual- ity of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Special service measures
Certain service measures which affect the car's electrical system can only be performed using electronic equipment specially developed for your car. For this reason, Volvo recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before beginning or performing service work that affects the electrical system.
09 Maintenance and service
Self-maintenance 09
207
Before starting work on the car
Battery
Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and tightened.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).
Never use a quick charger to charge the bat- tery. The battery cables must be disconnected when charging the battery.
The battery contains acid that is both corrosive and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the battery in an environmentally correct manner. Let your Volvo dealer assist you.
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage and output. The voltage in the ignition sys- tem is highly dangerous. The ignition must therefore always be switched off for work in the engine compartment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils when the ignition is on or the engine is hot.
Raising the car
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recom- mended by Volvo, follow the instructions for use supplied with the equipment.
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi- tion the jack against the front edge on the sub- frame.
Do not damage the splashguard under the engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are fixed under the lifting points. See preceding illustration.
Check regularly
Check the following at regular intervals, for example, when refuelling:
Coolant The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank.
Engine oil The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
Power steering fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
Washer fluid The reservoir should be well filled. Fill washer fluid with antifreeze at temperatures around freezing point.
Brake and clutch fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment 09
208
Opening the bonnet
The illustration shows a left-hand drive car.
1. Pull the handle on the far left under the instrument panel. (In right-hand drive cars the handle is on the far right.) You will hear when the catch releases.
2. Insert your hand under the centre of the front edge of the bonnet and press the safety catch to the right.
3. Open the bonnet.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.
Engine compartment
Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for the power steering fluid (con- cealed behind the headlamp)
Dipstick1 for engine oil2
Radiator
Radiator fan
Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)
Filling the engine oil2
1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel). 2 The location varies depending on engine alternative.
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment 09
209
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)
Battery
Relay and fuse box
Air filter2
2 The location varies depending on engine alternative.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
210
Checking the engine oil
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
Always use oil of the prescribed grade. Check the oil level frequently and change the oil regularly. The engine will be damaged if lower grade oil is used or if the car is driven with the oil level too low.
When driving under adverse conditions, see page 274.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer- tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed via the warning symbol in the centre of the instrument unit as well as by dis- play texts. Certain models have both variants. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord- ance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con- ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade, see page 274.
For capacities, see page 275 and onwards.
Engine with oil dipstick1
Petrol engine.
Dipstick, petrol engines.
Filler pipe, engine oil.
1 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
211
Diesel engine.
Dipstick, 4-cyl diesel engines.
Filler pipe, engine oil.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every 2 500 km. The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting. The measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme- diately after the engine is switched off. The dipstick will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump.
G 02 03 36
The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick.
Measurement and filling if required
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching off the engine it is important to wait 5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres should be added. If the level is significantly
below, then an additional amount is required.
6. If required, check the level again, do it after driving a short distance. Then repeat steps 1 - 4.
WARNING
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level should never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
212
For engines with electronic oil level
sensor2
Filler pipe.3
You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the display, see the illustration below.
Message and graph in the display.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see page 62.
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may be too high.
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low, Fill oil, only fill with 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system during driving. The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct.
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) appears as shown in the illustration below. The level must never be above MAX or below MIN, as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
2 Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel. 3 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
213
Measuring the oil level
If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below.
1. Activate key position II, see page 150.
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Engine oil level
Please wait.... > You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom- mended filling level is 4.
Washer fluid, topping up
The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.
For capacities, see the table Fluids on page 276.
Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel.
Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.
Add washer fluid with antifreeze in the winter so that the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
NOTE
Mix concentrated washer fluid with water before filling.
TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up washer fluid.
Checking and topping up the coolant
When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather con- ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
214
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. Otherwise, tem- peratures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding water quality, see page 276.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is not filled sufficiently, high local temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant when the level falls to the MIN mark.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.
NOTE
The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera- tures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.
Checking and topping up the brake and clutch fluid
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- voir4. The fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly. Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see the table Fluids on page 276.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi- cal climates with high humidity.
4 Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids 09
215
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
Checking and topping up the power steering fluid
NOTE
Check the level frequently.
The fluid does not require changing. For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see page 276.
If a fault should arise in the power steering sys- tem or if the car is without power and must be towed, it can still be steered. However, the steering will be much heavier than normal and it will require more effort to turn the steering wheel.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades 09
216
Wiper blades
G 02 03 30
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the other side.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see page 198.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.
Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen 1. Lift up the wiper arm.
2. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out (1), parallel with the wiper arm.
3. Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard. > Check (3) that the blade is firmly instal-
led and fold down the wiper arm.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
217
Operation
The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving con- ditions and climatic conditions.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running.
Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits star- ting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.
Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the owner's manual.
Store the battery out of the reach of children.
The battery contains cor- rosive acid.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery 09
218
Avoid sparks and naked flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recy- cling.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally correct manner as it con- tains lead.
Changing the battery
Removal
1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any electrical terminals. > The car's electrical system needs to
store the necessary information to the control modules.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Detach the black negative cable.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and neg- ative cables in the correct order.
5. Detach the red positive cable.
6. Undo the front wall of the battery box using a screwdriver.
7. Detach the ventilation hose from the bat- tery.
8. Release the clamp securing the battery.
9. Remove the battery.
Fitting
1. Fit the battery into position.
2. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
3. Connect the ventilation hose. > Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
4. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Attach the cover to the battery.
For more information on the car's battery - see pages 169 and 281.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
219
General
All bulb specifications are given on page 281.
The following list contains locations of bulbs and other light sources that are specialised or unsuitable for changing except at a workshop:
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon lamps)
Daytime running lights (DRL) in the spoiler
Direction indicators, door mirror and approach lighting
Reading lamps, courtesy lighting and glo- vebox lighting
General interior lighting in the roof
Brake light
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oil from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
Changing front bulbs
All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are changed by first removing the lamp housing from the engine compartment.
Removing the lamp housing
1. Remove the remote control key and turn the light switch to position 0.
2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector.
3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and then forward.
4. Unplug the connector by pressing down the clip with a thumb while moving out the connector with the other hand.
5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
Fitting the lamp housing
1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamp housing and locking pin. Check that the pin is correctly inserted.
2. Check the lighting.
The lamp housing must be plugged in and secured in place before the lighting is switched
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
220
on or the remote control key inserted into the ignition switch.
Dipped beam
Removing the cover and bulb
1. Remove the entire lamp housing.
2. Bend aside the catches and remove the cover.
3. Release the spring clip securing the bulb. First, press it to the left to release it, then out and down.
4. Pull out the bulb.
Fitting a new bulb
1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi- tion.
2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightly to the right in order to snap it into position.
3. Press the connector back on.
4. Refit the plastic cover.
5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 219.
Main beam
1. Remove the entire lamp housing.
2. Left-hand headlamp:
turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Right-hand headlamp:
turn the bulb holder clockwise.
3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the bulb.
4. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted in one position.
5. Refit the lamp housing.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
221
Position/parking lamps
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and withdraw it. Replace the bulb.
2. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted in one position.
Direction indicators
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and remove it.
2. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder, press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.
3. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into the lamp housing.
Side marker lamps
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and withdraw it. Replace the bulb.
2. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in one position.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
222
Front fog lamps
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0.
2. Pull the cover straight out in the direction of the centre of the car using a tool, see the illustration above. > (Loosen the clips (1) and pull straight out
(2).)
3. Remove the screw securing the lamp housing and take out the lamp housing.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out.
6. Fit the new bulb and turn it clockwise.
7. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the bulb holder must always be upward.
8. Secure the lamp housing with the screw and press the panel back into place.
Removing the bulb holder
All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster are replaced from inside the cargo area.
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0.
2. Remove the cover in the panel to access the bulbs. They are fitted in a separate bulb holder.
3. Unplug both connectors from the bulb holder.
4. Press the catches together and at the same time pull out the bulb holder.
5. Replace the bulb and plug in both connec- tors.
6. Press the bulb holder into place and refit the cover.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recom- mend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
223
Location of bulbs in the rear bulb holder
Bulb holder (right-hand bulb holder shown).
Fog lamp
Direction indicators
Reversing lamp
NOTE
The rear fog lamp only illuminates in the left rear light cluster on a left-hand drive car and in the right on a right-hand drive.
Number plate lighting
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0.
2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
3. Detach the lens carefully.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Refit and screw in the lens.
Cargo area
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs 09
224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Vanity mirror lighting*
G 02 02 53
Removing the mirror glass
1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the lug on the edge.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge on the left and right-hand sides (by the black rubber sections), and prize carefully so that the glass comes loose in the lower edge.
3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire mirror glass and cover.
4. Remove the blown bulb and replace it with a new one.
Fitting the mirror glass
1. First, press the three lugs at top edge of mirror glass back into position.
2. Then press the three lower lugs back into position.
Interior lighting, rear
G 02 09 69
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Remove the blown bulb.
3. Fit a new bulb.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
225
General
All electrical functions and components are fused to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting and overload- ing.
The fuses are in two different locations in the car:
Relay/Fuse box in the engine compart- ment.
Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compart- ment.
Changing
If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and blew.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.
Each fuse box has space for several spare fuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the component. In which case, Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for this to be checked.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
226
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment
G 00 74 46
The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure to replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.
Fuses 19-36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.
Fuses 7-18 are of the "JCASE" type and should be replaced by a workshop.1
Fuses 1-6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a workshop.1
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227
G 02 02 50
1. Cooling fan 50 A
2. Power steering 80 A
3. Supply to passenger compart- ment fuse box 60 A
4. Supply to passenger compart- ment fuse box 60 A
5. PTC element, air preheater* 80 A
6. Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70 A
7. ABS pump 40 A
8. ABS valves 20 A
9. Engine functions 30 A
10. Ventilation fan 40 A
11. Headlamp washer, Power roof, Lockable storage compart- ment 20 A
12. Heated rear window 30 A
13. Actuator solenoid, starter motor 30 A
14. Trailer wiring* 40 A
15. Power roof 30 A
16. Infotainment system 40 A
17. Windscreen wipers 30 A
18. Supply to passenger compart- ment fuse box 40 A
19. Reserve
20. Horn 15 A
21. Fuel-driven additional heater, passenger compartment heater* 20 A
22. Subwoofer 25 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
23. Engine control module (5-cyl. petrol), Transmission control module (5-cyl.) 10 A
24. Heated fuel filter (5-cyl. diesel), PTC element, oil trap (5-cyl. diesel) 20 A
25. Reserve -
26. Ignition switch 15 A
27. A/C compressor 10 A
28. Reserve
29. Front fog lamps
Daytime running lights (DRL)* 15 A
30. Reserve -
31. Reserve -
32. Injectors (5-cyl. petrol), Turbo control valve (5-cyl. diesel), Oil level sensor (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A
33. Vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol), Relay coil, relay, vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol), Engine control module (5-cyl. diesel) 20 A
34. Ignition coils (petrol), Pressure switch, climate control system (5-cyl.), Control module, glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel), EGR emission control (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A
35. Relay coil, relay, climate con- trol system, PTC element, oil trap (5-cyl. petrol), Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl. petrol), Turbo control valve (5-cyl. pet- rol), Solenoids, variable valve timing (5-cyl. petrol), Control valve, fuel pressure (5-cyl. die- sel), Engine control module (5- cyl. diesel) 15 A
36. Engine control module (petrol, DRIVe), Accelerator pedal position sensor (5-cyl. diesel), Lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
229
Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment
G 02 06 01
The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fuses are located under the glovebox. The box also provides space for several spare fuses. Tools for fuse replacement are located in the relay/ fuse box in the engine compartment, see page 226.
Replacing fuses
1. Remove the trim concealing the fuse box by pressing in the pin in the centre of the clips (1) about one cm and then withdraw- ing the clips.
2. Turn the two wing screws (that secure the fuse box) (2) anticlockwise and remove them.
3. Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it towards the seat until it stops. Lower it
completely. The fuse box can be fully unhooked.
4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order.
5. Remove the pins from the centre of the clips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert the pins into the clips. This expands the clips and secures the trim.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
43. Telematics*, Audio system, RTI*, Bluetooth* 15 A
44. SRS system, Engine control module (5-cyl.) 10 A
45. Electrical socket, passenger compartment 15 A
46. Passenger compartment, glo- vebox and courtesy lighting 5 A
47. Interior lighting, Remote con- trolled garage door opener* 5 A
48. Washer 15 A
49. SRS system 10 A
50. Reserve
51. PTC element, air preheater*, Relay coil, relay, heated fuel filter (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A
52. Transmission control module, ABS system 5 A
53. Power steering 10 A
54. Parking assistance*, Xenon* 10 A
55. Control module Keyless* 20 A
56. Remote control receiver, Siren* 10 A
57. Data link connector (DLC), brake light switch 15 A
58. Main beam, right, Relay coil, relay, auxiliary lamps* 7.5 A
59. Main beam, left 7.5 A
60. Seat heating (driver's side) 15 A
61. Seat heating (passenger side) 15 A
62. Reserve
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses 09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231
63. Supply, power window, right rear 20 A
64. Indicator lamps for door locks 5 A
65. Audio, Infotainment 5 A
66. Audio, Infotainment, Climate control system 10 A
67. Reserve
68. Cruise control 5 A
69. Climate control system, Rain sensor, Buttons for BLIS*, parking assistance* 5 A
70. Reserve
71. Reserve
72. Reserve
73. Overhead console for interior lighting, Seatbelt reminder, rear, Dimming, interior rear- view mirror* 5 A
74. Fuel pump 15 A
75. Reserve
76. Reserve
77. Electrical socket cargo area, Control module, accessories* 15 A
78. Reserve
79. Reversing lamp, Dimming, interior rearview mirror (signal) 5 A
80. Reserve -
81. Supply, power window, left rear 20 A
82. Supply, power window and door, right front 25 A
83. Supply, power window and door, left front 25 A
84. Power seat, passenger 25 A
85. Power seat, driver 25 A
86. Interior lighting, cargo area lighting, power seats 5 A
232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General.................................................................................................. 234 Audio functions..................................................................................... 236 Radio functions..................................................................................... 241 CD functions......................................................................................... 246 Menu structure audio system............................................................. 249 Phone functions*................................................................................... 250 Menu structure phone*....................................................................... 257 Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 260
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
10 Infotainment system
General
10
234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Infotainment system
G 02 02 45
POWER - Pushbutton, audio system on/ off
Display
Keypad
MENU - Goes to the menu system
Navigation buttons
EXIT - Exits the menu system
ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates
Infotainment is a system that integrates the audio system and phone*. The infotainment
system can be easily operated using the con- trol panel or the steering wheel keypad*, see page 68. The display (2) shows messages and information on the current function.
Audio system
On/Off
POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio sys- tem. If the audio system is active when the remote control key is turned to position 0 then it continues to be active until the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch. The audio system is started automatically the next time the remote control key is turned to posi- tion I.
Menus
Some infotainment system functions are con- trolled via a menu system. The current menu level is shown at the top right of the display. Menu options are shown in the middle of the display.
MENU (4) leads to the menu system.
Up/down with the navigation button (5) moves between menu options.
ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivates one of the menu options.
EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menu structure. A long press on EXIT will exit the menu system.
Shortcuts
Menu options are numbered and can also be selected directly with the keypad (3). So first press MENU and then the figure/figures for the desired menu option.
Equipment
The audio system can be equipped with differ- ent options and different versions. There are three audio system versions:
Performance,
High Performance* or
Premuim Sound*
However, FM radio with RDS, AM radio and CD player are included in all audio systems.
10 Infotainment system
General
10
235
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II 1
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes the two stereo audio channels to left, centre, right and rear speakers. This provides a more real- istic sound quality than that provided by stand- ard two-channel stereo.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby icon are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manu- factured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
1 Premium Sound.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Audio controls
VOLUME - Knob
AM/FM Audio source selection
MODE - Audio source selection, CD, AUX, USB (e.g. iPod )1 and BT*
TUNING - Knob
SOUND - Button
Navigation button - Menus
Volume
Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypad to regulate the volume, see page 68. Audio vol-
ume adjusts automatically depending on vehi- cle speed, see page 239.
Audio source selection
Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches between FM1, FM2 and AM.
Repeatedly pressing MODE changes between CD, USB, AUX and BT.
External audio sources
AUX, USB*
General
AUX input
USB input*
The AUX and USB inputs enable the connec- tion of an external audio source, e.g. an iPod 1 or MP3 player.
If you choose to connect an iPod , MP3 player or a USB memory stick to the USB connection then you can control the media via the car's audio controls.
1 USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
237
Use the MODE button to select the external audio source you wish to use.
1. If USB is selected then Connect device is shown in the display.
2. Connect your iPod , MP3 player or USB memory stick to the USB connection in the centre console's storage compartment (see preceding illustration). > The text Loading appears on the dis-
play when the system loads the file structure on the storage media. This takes a while.
When the loading is finished the track informa- tion is shown on the display and it is possible to select the track required.
Track selection can take place in the following three ways:
Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock- wise.
Use the right or left-hand button (6) of the navigation control to scroll to the desired track.
With the steering wheel keypad.
In USB or iPod mode the infotainment system operates in an equivalent way to the CD player for playing back music files. For more information, see page 246.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of music files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. However, there are variants of these file for- mats that are not supported by the system. The system also supports most iPod mod- els produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffle is not supported.
USB memory
To facilitate the use of USB memory avoid stor- ing any files other than music files in the mem- ory. It takes considerably longer for the system to load storage media that contains items other than playable music files.
NOTE
The system supports removable media which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi- mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The memory must have a capacity of at least 256 Mb.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system. For use in the system, an MP3 player must be set in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
iPod
An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection via the player's con- nection cable. However, if the player's battery is completely discharged then it must be charged before the player is connected.
NOTE
When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.
AUX
Sometimes the AUX external audio source can be heard at a different volume to the internal audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio volume of the external audio source is too high then the sound quality can be impaired. Pre- vent this by adjusting the input volume of the AUX input.
NOTE
The sound quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audio system is in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Streaming audio via Bluetooth *
General
If the car is equipped with Bluetooth hands- free* and a mobile phone is connected then the audio system can wirelessly play back stream- ing audio files from the mobile phone. Naviga- tion and control of the sound can be carried out via the centre console buttons or via the steer- ing wheel keypad*. In some mobile phones it is also possible to change tracks from the phone.
To be able to play back the audio a device must first be paired and connected to the car. For information about pairing and connection, see page 260. BT must also be selected as audio source, see page 236.
NOTE
The Bluetooth mobile phone must support the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). The phone should use AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise some functions may not work.
NOTE
Not all mobile phones available in the mar- ket are fully compatible with the Bluetooth function in the car's audio sys- tem. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones and external media players.
Playback
Press the MODE button repeatedly in order to select BT as audio source.
Audio file selection can take place in the fol- lowing three ways:
Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock- wise.
Use the or button (6) of the naviga- tion control to scroll to the desired audio file.
With the or buttons on the steering wheel keypad.
Audio settings
Adjusting audio settings
Press SOUND (5) repeatedly to browse among the following options. Adjust by turning TUNING.
BASS - Bass level.
TREBLE - Treble level.
FADER Balance between the front and rear speakers.
BALANCE Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.
SUBWOOFER* - Bass speaker level. Sub- woofer must be activated before adjust- ment is possible, see under the heading Activating/deactivating the subwoofer below.
CENTRE2 - Level for centre speaker. Three channel stereo or Pro Logic II must be activated before adjustment is possible, see under the heading Activating/deacti- vating surround sound below.
SURROUND2 - Level for surround. Pro Logic II must be activated before adjust- ment is possible, see under the heading Audio settings below.
2 Premium Sound.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
239
Activating/deactivating the subwoofer
Press MENU and then ENTER.
Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.
Scroll to Subwoofer and press ENTER.
Surround2
Surround settings govern the spatial perception of the sound. Settings and activating/deactivating are sep- arate for each audio source.
G 02 12 16
The Dolby icon in the display indicates that Dolby Pro Logic II is active. There are three different settings for surround sound:
Dolby Pro Logic II
3 channel
Off - 2 channel stereo.
Activating/deactivating surround sound
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Surround FM, Surround
AM, Surround CDor Surround
AUX and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Dolby Pro Logic II3, 3 channel
or Off and press ENTER.
Equalizer front/rear4
The equalizer can be used to adjust different frequency bands separately.
Adjusting equalizer
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Equalizer front or Equalizer
rear and press ENTER.
4. The graphic on the display indicates the audio level of the frequency in question.
5. Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/ down with the navigation button. Addi- tional frequencies can be selected using the left/right navigation button.
6. Save with ENTER or EXIT to exit without saving the settings.
Automatic volume control5
The auto volume control function allows the audio volume to increase as the speed of the car increases. There are three levels to choose from: Low, Medium and High.
Adjusting automatic volume control
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Auto. volume control and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Low, Medium or High and press ENTER.
Automatic audio settings
The acoustic properties of the passenger com- partment are changed when speed increases or when the roof is opened. For this reason the character of the sound is automatically adap- ted to these situations in order to provide the best possible sound. The adaptation that takes place when the roof is opened is fully auto- matic.
2 Premium Sound. 3 Not available in AM and FM mode. 4 Certain audio systems. 5 Not Performance
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeak- ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position etc. for each com- bination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control, radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating instructions, e.g. bass, treble and equalizer* are only intended for the user to be able to adapt the sound reproduction according to personal taste.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
241
Radio controls
G 01 98 06
FM/AM Wavelength selection
Station presets
TUNING Knob for station searches
SCAN Scanning
Navigation button - Tuning and menus
EXIT - Cancel current function
AUTO Automatic storage of stations
Tuning
Automatic tuning
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Give a brief press on or .
The radio then automatically searches for the next strong station.
Manual tuning
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING
(3).
Tune into a station with a long press on or . Or by using the steering wheel keypad:
Hold in or on the navigation button depressed until the desired frequency appears on the display.
As long as the frequency graphic appears on the display, searching can be resumed by briefly pressing or .
Storing stations
Ten station presets can be stored per wave- length. FM has two memories for presets: FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected using the preset buttons (2) or the steering wheel keypad.
Storing stations manually
1. Tune into a station.
2. Hold a station preset button depressed until the message Station stored appears on the display.
Automatic storage of stations
AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio sta- tions and stores them automatically in a sepa- rate memory. The function is especially useful in areas where the radio stations and their fre- quencies are unfamiliar.
Starting automatic storage of stations
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Hold AUTO (7) depressed until Autostoring appears on the display.
Once Autostoring disappears from the dis- play, the stations are stored. The radio contin- ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the display. The automatically stored presets can now be selected using the preset buttons (2).
Cancelling automatic storage of stations
Press EXIT (6).
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
242
Selecting an auto-stored preset
Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode pro- vides access to the autostored presets.
1. Briefly press AUTO (7). > Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button (2). > The radio remains in Auto mode until it
is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7), EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1) cancels Auto mode.
Storing autostored presets in another
memory
An autostored preset can be transferred to the FM or AM memory.
1. Briefly press AUTO (7). > Auto appears on the display.
2. Press the preset button for the station you want to move.
3. Press the button under which the station will be stored and hold it depressed until the message Station stored appears on the display. > The radio exits Auto mode and the
stored station can be selected as a pre- set.
Scanning
SCAN (4) automatically searches through a wavelength for strong stations. When a station is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds before scanning is resumed.
Activating/deactivating Scan
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM.
2. Press SCAN to activate. > SCAN appears on the display. Close
using SCAN or EXIT.
Storing a station
A selected station can be stored as a preset while SCAN is active.
Press a station preset button and hold it depressed until the message Station
stored appears on the display. > Scanning is interrupted and the stored
station can be selected as a preset.
RDS functions1
Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
Automatically switches to a stronger trans- mitter if reception in the area is poor.
Searches for programme form, such as traffic information or news.
Receives text information on current radio programme.
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only some if its functionality.
Programme functions
In FM mode, the radio can search for stations with certain programme types. If a required programme type is located the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans- mission is played at a preset audio volume, see page 245. The radio returns to the previous audio source and audio volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!), traffic information (TP), news (News), and pro-
1 The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
243
gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another in order of priority, where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the lowest.
If you want to return to the interrupted audio source before the message or programme type has been completed, press EXIT.
For further programme interruption settings, see EON and REG see page 244. The pro- gramme functions are modified via the menu system, see page 234.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious acci- dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The message ALARM! appears on the display when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information TP
This function allows traffic informa- tion broadcast within a set station's RDS network to break through. TP
shows that the function has been activated. If the set station can send traffic information then appears on the display.
G 02 12 20
Activating/deactivating TP
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
TP from current station/all stations
The radio can interrupt with traffic information from only the set (current) station or from all stations.
1. Select an FM station.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to TP station and press ENTER. > Either TP from current station or TP
from all stations is shown on the dis- play.
6. Press ENTER.
Activating/deactivating TP search
TP search is useful during long journeys while an audio source other than the radio is being played. The function automatically searches for traffic information within different RDS networks.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.
News
This function allows news broad- casts within a set station's RDS network to break through. The message News shows that the func-
tion is active.
G 02 12 21
Activating/deactivating News
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to News and press ENTER.
News from current station/all stations
The radio can interrupt with news from only the set (current) station or from all stations.
1. Select an FM station.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to News station and press ENTER. > Either News from current station or
News from all stations is shown on the display.
5. Press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
244
Programme types PTY
The PTY function can be used to select different programme types, such as Pop music and Serious
classic. The PTY symbol indicates that the function is active. This function allows programme types broadcast within a set sta- tion's RDS network to break through.
G 02 12 22
Activating/deactivating PTY
1. Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Select PTY and press ENTER. > A list of programme types appears:
Current affairs, Information etc. The PTY function is activated by selecting programme types and deactivated by clearing all PTYs.
5. Select the desired programme types or Clear all PTY
Search PTY
This function searches the entire wavelength for the selected programme type.
1. Activate PTY.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.
If the radio finds any of the selected pro- gramme types, >| To seek appears on the dis- play. Press the navigation button to con- tinue searching for another broadcast of the selected programme types.
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station can be shown on the display.
NOTE
Not all radio stations support this function.
Activating/deactivating display
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.
Radio text
Some RDS stations transmit information on programme content, artists, etc. This informa- tion can be shown on the display.
Activating/deactivating radio text
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.
Automatic frequency update AF
The AF function selects one of the strongest transmitters for a set station. The radio may sometimes need to search through the entire FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If this occurs, the radio mutes and PI seekEXIT
to cancel appears in the display.
Activating/deactivating AF
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to AF and press ENTER.
Regional radio programmes REG
This function causes the radio to con- tinue with a regional transmitter even if its signal strength is low. Regional indicates that the function
is active. The regional function is normally deactivated.
G 02 12 23
Activating/deactivating REG
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
245
Enhanced Other Networks EON
The EON function is especially useful in urban areas with many regional radio stations. It allows the distance between the car and the radio station transmitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the cur- rent audio source.
Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.
Distant interrupts if the station transmit- ter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.
Off no interruption for programmes from other transmitters.
Activating/deactivating EON
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to EON and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and press ENTER.
Resetting RDS functions
Resets all radio settings to the original factory settings.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Reset all and press ENTER.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types are heard at the volume selected for each programme type. If the volume level is adjusted during the pro- gramme interruption, the new level is saved until the next programme interruption.
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
CD function controls
G 01 98 07
Navigation button Fast forward/rewind, track selection and menus
CD changer position selection*
CD insertion/eject
CD insertion/eject slot
MODE - Selection of audio source (CD, AUX, USB*)
TUNING - Knob for track selection
Starting playback (CD player)
If a music CD is in the player when the audio system is in CD mode then playback is started
automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and change to CD mode by pressing MODE.
Start playback (CD changer*)
If a CD position with a music CD is already selected when the audio system is activated then playback starts automatically. Otherwise change to CD changer mode using MODE and select a disc with the number buttons 16 or Up/Down on the navigation button.
Insert a CD
1. Select an empty position with buttons 1
6 or Up/Down on the navigation button. > An empty position is marked on the dis-
play. The text Insert disc shows that a new disc can be inserted. The CD changer can hold up to 6 CD discs.
2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer.
CD eject
A CD will stay in the ejected position for approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re- inserted in the player and playback continues.
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but- ton (3).
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by disc. The message EJECT ALL is shown in the display.
Pause
If the volume is turned down completely, the CD player is stopped. The player is restarted when volume is increased.
Audio files*
The CD player/CD changer* also supports MP3 and WMA format audio files.
NOTE
Certain types of copy-protected audio files cannot be read by the player.
When a CD containing audio files is inserted into the player the disc's folder structure is loa- ded in. It may take a while before playback starts due to the quality of the disc.
Navigation and playback
If a disc with audio files is inserted in the CD player then the disc's folder structure is shown by pressing ENTER. The folder struc- ture is navigated in the same way as the audio system's menu structure. Audio files have the symbol and folders have the symbol . Start audio file playback with ENTER.
When the playback of a file is finished the play- back of the other files in the same folder con- tinues. Folder change takes place automati-
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
247
cally when all files in the current folder have been played back.
Press left/right on the navigation button if the display is not wide enough to show the whole audio file name.
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio
files
Short presses right/left on the navigation but- ton are used to scroll between CD tracks/audio files. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (or the steering wheel keypad) can also be used for this purpose.
Scan CD
This function plays the first 10 seconds of each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to activate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue play- back of the current CD track/audio file.
Random
This function plays the tracks in random order. The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol- led through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks 1 on the current disc.
Different messages appear on the display depending on which random function has been selected:
RANDOM means that the tracks from only one music CD are played
RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the CD changer are played.
RND FLD means that the audio files in a folder on the current CD are played.
Activating/deactivating, random (CD
player)
If a normal music CD is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
If a disc with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Folder or Disc and press ENTER.
Activating/deactivating, random (CD
changer)
If a normal music CD is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Single disc or All discs and press ENTER.
The option All discs only applies to the music CDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Single disc or Folder and press ENTER.
The function is deactivated when another CD is selected.
Disc text
If title information is stored on a music CD then it can be shown on the display2.
Activate/deactivate
1. Start CD playback.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.
1 Applies to the CD changer. 2 Applies to CD changer.
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
10
248
CDs
Using low quality CD discs could result in poor or non-existent sound.
IMPORTANT
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CD discs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure audio system
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249
Overview
FM MENU1
1. News
2. TP
3. PTY
4. Radio text
5. Advanced radio settings
6.* Audio settings
AM MENU
1.* Audio settings
CD MENU
For CD player with CD disc.
1. Random
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5.* Audio settings
CD MENU
For CD player with MP3 disc.
1. Playlist
2. Random
3. News
4. TP
5. Disc text
6.* Audio settings
CD MENU
For CD changer* with CD disc selected.
1. Random
2. News
3. TP
4. Disc text
5.* Audio settings
CD MENU
For CD changer* with MP3 disc selected.
1. Playlist
2. Random
3. News
4. TP
5. Disc text
6.* Audio settings
AUX MENU
1. AUX input volume
2. News
3. TP
4.* Audio settings
USB MENU*
1. Playlist
2. Random
3. News
4. TP
5. Track information
6. Audio settings
1 The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Phone system components.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251
Phone system components
Antenna1
Steering wheel keypad. Most phone sys- tem functions can be accessed via the key- pad. see page 252.
Microphone. The hands free microphone is integrated in the roof console beside the rearview mirror.
Centre console control panel. All phone functions (except call volume) can be regu- lated via the control panel.
SIM card reader
General
Always put traffic safety first.
Switch off the phone system when refuel- ling the car.
Switch off the system near blasting work.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out phone system servicing.
Emergency calls
Emergency calls to alarm centres can be made without a SIM card as long as there is coverage by a network operator.
Making an emergency call
1. Activate the phone.
2. Ring the emergency number that applies to your region (within EU: 112).
3. Press ENTER.
IDIS
With the IDIS system (Intelligent Driver Information System), incoming phone calls and SMS messages can be delayed so that con- centration can be focused on driving when IDIS determines that the traffic situation requires a high level of attention.
Incoming calls and SMS messages can be delayed 5 seconds before they are diverted. If the current traffic situation still requires a high level of attention from the driver then the incoming call is diverted to the voice mail. Missed calls are shown in the display.
IDIS be disconnected using menu function 6.5, see page 257.
SIM card
G 02 02 44
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM card Subscriber Identity Module. Cards are available from various network operators. Con- tact your network operator if you experience difficulties with the SIM card.
NOTE
The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM cards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cards work. Contact your network operator if a replacement SIM card is required.
1 Available only for built-in phone or RTI.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Extra SIM card
Many network operators offer two SIM cards for the same phone number. The extra SIM card can be used in the car.
Inserting the SIM card
1. Switch off the phone and open the glove- box.
2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIM card reader, see illustration on page 251.
3. Position the SIM card in the holder with the metal surface visible. The bevelled edge of the SIM card should align with the bevel of the SIM card holder.
4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder.
Menus
Page 257 describes how to control phone functions with the menu system.
Traffic safety
For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu system cannot be accessed at speeds in excess of 8 km/h.
Phone controls
G 01 98 09
Centre console control panel.
VOLUME - Control the background vol- ume from the radio, for example, during a call
Number and letter buttons
MENU - Opens the main menu
EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char- acters
Navigation button Scroll in menus and character rows
ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but- ton reveals latest dialled numbers
PHONE - On/off and standby mode
Steering wheel keypad
G 02 02 43
When the phone is active, the steering wheel keypad is locked to phone functions. To con- trol the audio system, the phone must be in standby mode (standby).
ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but- ton reveals latest dialled numbers.
EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char- acters. Changes between the audio menu and the phone menu.
Call volume Increase/decrease
Navigation buttons Scroll in menus
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253
On/Off
A handset appears in the display when the phone system is active or in standby mode (standby). If the remote control key is turned to position 0 when the phone is in one of these modes, the phone automatically resumes this mode the next time the remote control key is turned to position I or II.
Activating the phone system
Phone system functions can only be used when the phone is in active mode.
1. Press PHONE.
2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and press ENTER.
Deactivating the phone system
No calls can be received when the phone sys- tem is deactivated.
Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is deactivated.
Standby mode (standby)
In standby mode, the audio system can be in use while calls are received. However, it is not possible to make calls when in standby mode.
Putting the phone in standby mode
The phone must first be in active mode before it can be put in standby mode.
Press PHONE.
Activating from standby mode
Press PHONE.
Making and receiving calls
To call
1. Activate the phone system (if necessary).
2. Dial the number or use the phone book, see page 255.
3. Press ENTER.
Receiving a call
For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, see page 257.
Press ENTER.
Ending a call
Press EXIT.
Refusing a call
Press EXIT.
Call waiting
A two-tone signal during a phone call indicates that there is another incoming call. Answer? is shown in the display. The call can be refused or taken in the normal manner. If the incoming call is taken, the previous call is put on hold.
Putting a call on hold/resuming a call
1. Press MENU or ENTER.
2. Scroll to Hold or Resume and press ENTER.
Dialling a third party
1. Put the call on hold.
2. Dial the number of the third party.
Switching between calls
1. Press MENU or ENTER.
2. Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.
Starting a conference call
A conference call consists of three parties that can talk to one another. Once a conference call has been initiated, no more parties can be con- nected. All calls are ended when a conference call is ended.
1. Start two phone calls.
2. Press MENU or ENTER.
3. Scroll to Join and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volume
The phone uses the driver's door speaker.
Call volume
Call volume is regulated with the steering wheel keypad.
Audio system volume
Audio system volume is temporarily lowered during a phone call. Once the call is ended the previous volume is resumed. If the volume is regulated during the call, the new level is retained once the call is ended. Sound can also be automatically muted during a phone call, see menu 6.4.3, on page 257. This function only applies to the Volvo integrated phone sys- tem.
Entering text
Text is entered using the phone keypad.
1. Press the key with the desired character - once for the first character on the button, twice for the second, etc. See table.
2. Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a row are to be entered using the same but- ton, press * or wait a few seconds.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered characters.
Key Function
space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( )
a b c 2
d e f 3
g h i 4
j k l 5
m n o 6
p q r s 7
t u v 8
w x y z 9
Pressed briefly if two char- acters shall be entered after each other with the same key.
Key Function
+ 0 @ * # & $ / %
Switch between upper and lower case.
Handling numbers
Calling the last number dialled
The phone automatically stores the last phone numbers dialled.
1. Press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a number and press ENTER.
Phonebook
If the phone book contains a live caller's con- tact information then this is shown in the dis- play. Contact information can be stored on the SIM card and in the phone.
Storing contacts in the phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to New contact and press ENTER.
4. Enter a name and press ENTER.
5. Enter a number and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255
6. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and press ENTER.
Searching for contacts in the phone book
Use the down arrow of the navigation button instead of MENU for direct access to the Search menu.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
5. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
Copying entries between the SIM card
and Phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Copy all and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM
and press ENTER.
Deleting contacts from the phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
5. Scroll to the item to be erased and press ENTER.
6. Scroll to Erase and press ENTER.
Erase all contacts
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone and press ENTER.
If required, enter phone code. The factory-set default code is 1234.
Speed dial
A keypad button (19) can be used as a speed dial number for a contact in the phone book.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Speed dial and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Select numbers and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for the speed dial number and press ENTER.
6. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
7. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
8. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu system.
Calling using speed dial
Briefly press the required keypad button, followed by ENTER.
NOTE
It takes a short time before speed dialling becomes available after the phone has been activated.
To use the speed dial function Speed dial
must be activated in the Phone book menu, see page 259.
Calling from the phone book
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER. > All contacts in the phone book memory
are displayed. The number of contacts displayed can be reduced by entering part of the contact's name.
3. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Press ENTER to dial.
NOTE
Hold in the required letter/button in the key- pad for about 2 seconds to reach the cor- responding letter in the phone book.
Functions during a call
Several functions are available during a call. Some functions can only be used when a call is on hold.
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access the In-call menu and scroll to one of the fol- lowing alternatives:
1. Mute microphone/Microphone on Mute mode.
2. Hold/Resume - Put a call on hold or resume a call.
3. Phone book Show phone book.
4. Join Conference calling (available if more than two parties are connected)
5. Swap Switch between two calls (availa- ble if up to three parties are connected).
SMS - Short Message Service
Reading SMS
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Read and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to a message and press ENTER. > The message text is shown in the dis-
play. Additional selections can be made by pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT
depressed to leave the menu system.
Writing and sending
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.
4. Enter text and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.
6. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.
IMEI number
To block the phone, you must provide your network operator with the phone's IMEI num- ber. This is a 15 digit serial number that is pro- grammed into the phone. Dial *#06# to show this number in the display. Write it down and keep it in a safe place.
Specifications
Output 2 W
SIM card Small
Memory entries 250A
SMS (Short Message Serv- ice)
Yes
Data/Fax No
Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes
A In the phone, plus the number of memory spaces that are available on the SIM card.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure phone*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257
Phone menu
1. Call register
1.1. Last 10 missed calls
1.2. Last 10 received calls
1.3. Last 10 dialled calls
1.4. Erase list
1.4.1. All calls
1.4.2. Missed calls
1.4.3. Received calls
1.4.4. Dialled numbers
1.5. Call duration
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Reset timers
2. Phone book
2.1. Search
2.2. New contact
2.3. Copy all
2.3.1. SIM to phone
2.3.2. Phone to SIM
2.4. Speed dial
2.4.1. Active
2.4.2. Select numbers
2.5. Erase SIM
2.6. Erase phone
2.7. Memory status
3. Messages
3.1. Read
3.2. Write new
3.3. Message settings
3.3.1. SMSC number
3.3.2. Validity time
3.3.3. Message type
4 Call options
4.1. Send my number
4.2. Call waiting
4.3. Automatic answer
4.4. Auto re-dial
4.5. Voice mail number
4.6. Diversions
4.6.1. All calls
4.6.2. When busy
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not reachable
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Change phone
5.1. Carphone
5.2. Add phone
5.37. Added phones1
NOTE
The menu above only applies to cars with BluetoothTM handsfree.
6. Phone settings
6.1. Network selection
6.1.1. Automatic
6.1.2. Manual select
6.2. SIM security
6.2.1. On
6.2.2. Off
1 A maximum of 5 phones.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure phone*
10
258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
6.2.3. Automatic
6.3. Edit PIN code
6.4. Sounds and volume
6.4.1. Ring volume
6.4.2. Ring signals
6.4.3. Mute radio
6.4.4. Message beep
6.5. IDIS
6.6. Reset phone settings
Description of menu options
1. Call register
1.1. Last 10 missed
List of missed calls. You can choose to call, erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.2. Last 10 received
List of received calls. You can choose to call, erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.3. Last 10 dialled
List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call, erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.4. Erase list
Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 as below.
1.4.1. All calls
1.4.2. Missed calls
1.4.3. Received calls
1.4.4. Dialled numbers
1.5. Call duration
Duration of all calls or of the most recent call. To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4.
1.5.1. Last call
1.5.2. Call count
1.5.3. Total time
1.5.4. Reset timers
2. Phone book
2.1. Search
Search for a name in the phone book.
2.2. New contact
Store names and phone numbers in the phone book, see page 254.
2.3. Copy all
Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM card to the phone memory.
2.3.1. SIM to phone
2.3.2. Phone to SIM
2.4. Speed dial
A number stored in the phone book can be stored as a speed dial number.
2.4.1 Active
2.4.2 Select numbers
2.5. Erase SIM
Erase the entire SIM card memory.
2.6. Erase phone
Erase the entire phone memory.
2.7. Memory status
Shows how many positions are occupied in the SIM card and phone memory. The table shows how many of the total number of positions are occupied, e.g. 100 (250).
3. Messages
3.1. Read
Received text messages. Select whether to erase, forward, change or save the entire mes- sage or parts of it.
3.2. Write new
Write a message using the keypad. Choose whether to save or send it.
3.3. Message settings
Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes- sage centre to which messages are to be trans- ferred as well as how long they are to be saved at the message centre. Contact your network
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure phone*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259
operator for information on message settings. Normally, these settings should not be altered.
3.3.1. SMSC number
3.3.2. Validity time
3.3.3. Message type
4. Call settings
4.1. Send my number
Displays or hides your phone number to/from the person you call. Contact your network operator regarding ex-directory numbers.
4.2. Call waiting
Be alerted during a phone call that there is another incoming call.
4.3. Auto answer
Automatically answers incoming calls.
4.4. Auto redial
Automatically calls a previously engaged num- ber.
4.5. Voice mail number
Stores voice mail number.
4.6. Call divert
Choose when and what type of calls are to be diverted to a specified phone number.
4.6.1. All calls
This setting only applies during the call in pro- gress.
4.6.2 When busy
4.6.3. Not answered
4.6.4. Not reachable
4.6.5. Fax calls
4.6.6. Data calls
4.6.7. Cancel all
5. Change phone
5.1. Car phone
Select the built-in phone.
5.2. Add phone
Add mobile phones to the list Added phones.
5.3-7. Added phones
Select to connect to one of the added phones (up to 5 phones).
NOTE
The menu above only applies to cars with BluetoothTM handsfree.
6. Phone settings
6.1. Selecting network
Choose a network automatically or manually. The selected network is shown in the display in the phone's basic mode.
6.1.1. Automatic
6.1.2. Manual select
6.2. SIM security
Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if the phone should automatically give the PIN code.
6.2.1. On
6.2.2. Off
6.2.3. Automatic
6.3. Edit PIN code
Change PIN code. Write down and save the code in a safe place.
6.4. Sounds and volume
6.4.1. Ring volume
Adjust the ring tone volume.
6.4.2. Ring signals
There are seven different ring tones.
6.4.3. Mute radio
The radio can be switched off/on.
6.4.4. Message beep
6.5. IDIS
If the IDIS function is deactivated, incoming calls are not delayed, regardless of the driving situation.
6.6. Reset phone settings
Reset the system's factory settings.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
G 02 95 03
System overview.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Centre console
BluetoothTM
A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys- tem. The audio system then works handsfree, with the option to control a range of the mobile phone's functions remotely. The microphone is fitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phone can always be operated by its own keys irre- spective of whether or not it is connected.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.
Menus and controls
The menus are navigated using the control panel in the centre console (3), see page 252.
Remember
The menus are controlled from the centre con- sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen- eral information on menus, see page 257.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with both BluetoothTM handsfree and built-in phone then there is an additional menu in the phone menu, see page 257.
Activate/deactivate
A short press on PHONE activates the hands- free function. The text PHONE at the top of the display shows that it is in phone mode. The symbol shows that the handsfree func- tion is active.
One long press on PHONE deactivates the handsfree function and disconnects a con- nected phone.
Connect mobile phone
A mobile phone is connected in different ways depending on whether or not it has been con- nected previously. To connect a mobile phone for the first time, follow the instructions below:
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible via BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone's manual or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function with PHONE. > Menu option Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile phones have already been registered then these are also shown.
3. Select Add phone. > The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes approximately 30 seconds. The mobile phones detected are specified with their respective BluetoothTM name in the dis- play. The handsfree function's BluetoothTM name is shown in the mobile phone as My Volvo Car.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the audio system display.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audio system display via the mobile phone key- pad.
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
1. Activate the handsfree function with PHONE. If there is a phone connected, disconnect the connected phone.
2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone's manual.
3. Select My Volvo Car in the list of units detected in your mobile phone.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile phone when prompted for the PIN code.
5. Select to connect to My Volvo Car from the mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered and connected automatically to the audio system while the text Synchronising is shown in the display. For more information on how mobile phones are registered, see page 262.
When the connection is established the symbol is shown and the mobile phone's
BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now
the mobile phone can be controlled from the audio system.
To call
1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display and that the symbol is visible.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book, see page 263.
3. Press ENTER.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the mobile phone moves out of the audio system's range. For more information on connection, see page 262.
Manual disconnection takes place by deacti- vating the handsfree function with one long press on PHONE. The handsfree function is also deactivated when the engine is switched off or when a door is opened1.
When the mobile phone has been discon- nected an ongoing call can be continued with the mobile phone's built-in microphone and speaker.
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that the changeover from handsfree is confirmed from the phone's keypad.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the audio system is in CD or FM mode for example. Refuse or end with EXIT.
Auto answer
The automatic answer function means that calls are accepted automatically. Activate/ deactivate under Phone Menu Call
options Automatic answer.
In-call menu
Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call to access the following functions:
Mute microphone - audio system micro- phone is muted.
Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- ferred to the mobile phone.
1 Applies to Keyless Drive.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connection is terminated when the privacy function is used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.
Phone book searching in the phone book.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during an ongoing call.
Audio settings
Call volume
Call volume can be adjusted during calls. Use the steering wheel keypad.
Audio system volume
In phone mode (PHONE) the audio system vol- ume can be adjusted as usual with VOLUME.
The audio source can be automatically muted for incoming calls under Phone Menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
Mute radio.
Ring volume
Go to Phone Menu Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring volume
and adjust with / on the navigation but- ton.
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring sig- nals that can be selected under Phone
Menu Phone settings Sounds and
volume Ring signals Ring signal 1
etc.
NOTE
The connected mobile phone's ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree system's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring signal2, go to Phone Menu Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
signals Use mobile phone signal.
More on registering and connecting
A maximum of three mobile phones can be registered. Registration is performed once per phone. After registration the mobile phone is in the list of added phones. Not more than one mobile phone can be connected at a time. Phones can be deregistered under Phone
Menu Bluetooth Remove phone.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the last mobile phone connected is in range it is connected automatically. When the audio sys- tem searches for the last phone connected its name is shown in the display. To change over to manual connection of another phone, press EXIT.
Manual connection
If you want to connect a mobile phone other than the last connected or change the con- nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
Set the audio system in phone mode (PHONE) and follow the instructions on the display or change the connected mobile phone by using the menu system as described below.
The menu structure is available in two variants depending on whether the car only has
2 Not supported by all mobile phones.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263
BluetoothTM or if the car also has a built-in phone.
For cars with only BluetoothTM the connec- tion is made under Phone Menu
Bluetooth Change phone Add
phone or select one of the previously con- nected phones.
For cars with built-in phone and BluetoothTM the connection is made under Phone Menu Change phone Add
phone or select one of the previously con- nected phones.
Phonebook
All use of the phone book presupposes that the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display and that the symbol is visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone book from each registered mobile phone. The phone book is copied automatically to the audio system during each connection. Deacti- vate the function under Phone settings
Synchronise phone book. Searching for con- tacts is only performed in the connected mobile phone's phone book.
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copy- ing of the phone book then List is empty is shown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's contact information then this is shown in the display.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search in the phone book is with long presses on the keys 29. This starts a search in the phone book based on the key's first letter.
The phone book can also be reached with / on the navigation button or with / on
the steering wheel keypad. The search can also be performed from the phone book's Search menu under Phone book Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and press ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to call.
Voice recognition
The mobile phone's voice recognition function for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the voice recognition func- tion. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.
Voice mail number
The number to the voice mail is changed under Call options Voice mail number. If no number is stored then this menu is reached with one long press on 1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored number.
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree func- tion at each new connection and are then updated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists are available under Call register.
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled numbers in reverse order.
Inputting text
Input text using the keypad in the centre con- sole. Press once for the key's first character,
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for more characters, see the table on page 254.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input characters. / on the navigation button scrolls between the characters.
Menu structure - BluetoothTM
handsfree
NOTE
The menu for BluetoothTM handsfree is available in two variants. For cars with only BluetoothTM handsfree and for cars with built-in phone and BluetoothTM handsfree.
1. Call register
1.1. Last 10 missed calls
1.2. Last 10 received calls
1.3. Last 10 dialled calls
2. Phone book
2.1. Search
2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone
3. Bluetooth
3.1. Change phone
3.1.1. Add phone
3.1.26.Added phones3
3.2. Remove phone
3.3. Connect fr. mobile phone
3.4. Car Bluetooth info
4. Call options
4.1. Automatic answer
4.2. Voice mail number
5. Phone settings
5.1. Sounds and volume
5.1.1. Ring volume
5.1.2. Ring signals
5.1.3. Mute radio
5.2. Synchronise phone book
Menu structure - BluetoothTM
handsfree with built-in phone
1. Call register
1.1. Last 10 missed calls
1.2. Last 10 received calls
1.3. Last 10 dialled calls
2. Phone book
2.1. Search
2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone
3. Bluetooth
3.1. Remove phone
3.2. Connect fr. mobile phone
3.3. Car Bluetooth info
4. Call options
4.1. Automatic answer
4.2. Voice mail number
5. Change phone
5.1. Carphone
5.2. Add phone
5.37. Added phones3
3 A maximum of 5 phones.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265
6. Phone settings
6.1. Sounds and volume
6.1.1. Ring volume
6.1.2. Ring signals
6.1.3. Mute radio
6.2. Synchronise phone book
266
Type designation................................................................................... 268 Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 270 Engine specifications............................................................................ 273 Engine oil............................................................................................... 274 Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 276 Fuel....................................................................................................... 278 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 280 Electrical system................................................................................... 281 Type approval....................................................................................... 283 Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 284
SPECIF ICATIONS
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
268
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
269
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili- tate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification number, maximum permissible weights, codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number. S40 and V50: The label is visible when the right rear door is opened. C30 and C70: The label is visible when the right door is opened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code, component and serial num- bers.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num- ber:
manual gearbox
, automatic gearbox
The car's identification number (VIN Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
270
Dimensions
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2640
B Length 4615
C Load length, floor 850
D Boot lid, raised approx. 200
E1 Height 1400
E2 Height approx. 2000
Dimensions mm
F Load height with roof up 525
Load height with roof down 265
G Front track 1550
H Rear track 1560
I Load width, floor 960
J Width 1836 (1851A)
Dimensions mm
K Width including door mirrors 2025
L Width including folded-in door mirrors 1847
A with Keyless drive*
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
271
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see table) influences the payload and is not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with- out extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor- respondingly by the weight of the acces- sory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load- ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Carpets, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own partic- ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
For decal location, see page 268.
Max. total weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Towing capacity and towball load
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
11
272
Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)
1500 75
Maximum weight, unbraked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)
750 50
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
273
Overview
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine Engine
codeA
Output (kW/rpm)
Output (hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/ rpm)
No. of cylinders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Swept volume (litres)
Com- pression
ratio
T5 B5254T7 169/5000 230/5000 320/1500 5000 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1
D3 D5204T5 110/3500 150/3500 350/1500--2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1
D4 D5204T 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 268.
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
274
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C
The above also apply to shorter driving dis- tances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
275
Engine oil grade
Engine Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T5 B5254T7 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
Viscosity: SAE 0W30
approx. 5.8
D3 D5204T5 approx. 5.9
D4 D5204T approx. 5.9
For filling engine oil, see page 210.
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
276
Overview
IMPORTANT
The recommended transmission fluid must be used to prevent damage to the gearbox. Do not mix with any other transmission fluid. If the transmission is topped up with a dif- ferent fluid, contact a workshop nearby for servicing. Volvo recommends that you con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Gearbox oil
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
M66 1.9 BOT 350M3
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309
TF-80SC 7.0 AW1
Fluids
Fluid System Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade
Coolant T5, automatic gear- box
7.5 Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% waterA, see the packaging. The thermostat starts opening at 90 C
D3 and D4 8.5
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
277
Fluid System Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade
Refrigerant Air conditioning B R134a (HFC134a)
Oil: PAG
Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+
Power steering fluid
Power steering 1.0-1.2 WSS M2C204-A or equivalent product with same specifications.
Washer fluid all 6.5 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point.
Fuel Petrol engine approx. 62 Petrol: see page 143
Diesel engine approx. 60 Diesel: see page 144
A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
278
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption
A B C
T5 328 14.0 156 6.7 219 9.4
D3 210 7.9 122 4.6 154 5.9
D3 230 8.7 134 5.1 169 6.4
D4 210 7.9 122 4.6 154 5.9
D4 230 8.7 134 5.1 169 6.4
: gram/km
: litre/100 km
A = urban driving
B = extra-urban driving
C = combined driving
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles1, that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and carbon diox- ide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table's val- ues. Examples of this are:
1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
11 Specifications
Fuel
11
279
The driver's driving style.
If the customer has specified wheels larger than those fitted as standard on the mod- el's basic version, then resistance increa- ses.
High speed results in increased wind resis- tance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to1.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles1
which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based.
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce consumption:
Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel- eration as well as braking too hard.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre pressure table on page 280.
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump- tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
See further information and more advice on pages 13 and 140.
See page 143 for general information on fuel.
1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
11 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
11
280
Approved tyre pressures
Engine Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load
Front (kPa)A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB
T5
215/55 R16 91W 0160 210 210 250 250 250
160+ 260 210 280 260 -
215/50 R17 91W
235/45 R17 94W
235/40 R18 91Y
0160 220 220 250 250 250
160+ 270 220 290 270 -
D3
D4
215/55 R16 91 W 0160 230 210 250 250 250
160+ 260 210 280 260 -
215/50 R17 91W
235/45 R17 94W
235/40 R18 91Y
0160 240 220 250 250 250
160+ 270 220 290 270 -
Temporary Spare Tyre 080 420 420 420 420 -
A In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. B Economical driving, see page 186
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
281
General
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The battery capacity is dependent upon the equipment level in the vehicle. If the starter battery is replaced, therefore, you must ensure that you switch to a battery with the same
capacity as the original battery (see the label on the battery).
Battery
Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
Reserve capacity
(minutes)
Capacity (Ah)
12 590 100 60
760 A 120 70
12 700 B 135 80
A Cars equipped with High Performance audio system. B Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.
Bulbs
Lighting Output (W) Type
Dipped beam, halogen 55 H7 LL
Main beam, halogen 65 H9
Extra main beam, ABL 55 H7 LL
Front direction indicators 24 PY24W SV
Position/parking lamps, front 5 W5W LL BV
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
282 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lighting Output (W) Type
Side marker lamps, front 5 WY5W LL
Fog lamps 35 H8
Side direction indicators, door mirrors 5 WY5W LL
Front courtesy lighting 3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d
Glovebox lighting 3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d
Vanity mirror lighting* 1.2 Socket SV5.5 Length 35 mm
Cargo area lighting 5 Socket SV8.5 Length 38 mm
Number plate lighting 5 C5W LL
Rear direction indicators 21 PY21WSV
Position lamps, rear - -
Brake light - -
Reversing lamp 6 H6W
Rear fog lamp 21 P21W LL
11 Specifications
Type approval
11
283
Remote control key system
Country and region
A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK, E, EST, F, FIN, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT, LV, M, NL, P, PL, S, SK, SLO
Delphi hereby certifies that this remote control key system conforms to the essential char- acteristic require- ments and other rel- evant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
IS, LI, N, CH
HR
ROK Delphi 2003-07-15, Germany R- LPD1-03-0151
BR
TW
ETC093LPD0155
Certification of the Keyless Drive system
Siemens VDO Automotive A.G. hereby certifies that this equipment type 5WK4 8952, 5WK48956, 5WK48812 conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of Directive 1999/5/EC.
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
284 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information symbols. Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found. For more information on symbols and text messages, see pages 50 and 54.
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display at the same time.
- Yellow information symbol, illuminates in combination with text in the information dis- play, when a deviation in any of the car's sys- tems has occurred. The yellow symbol infor- mation can also illuminate in combination with other symbols.
Symbols in the display
Indicator and warning symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Warning 19, 32, 50, 53
Information 50, 53, 160, 162
Emissions system
50, 51
Fault in the ABS system
51, 52
Rear fog lamp 51
Symbol Meaning Page
Stability sys- tem, DSTC*
51, 159, 160
Engine pre- heater (diesel)
51
Low level in fuel tank
51
Indicator sym- bol for trailer
52
Parking brake applied
52
Airbags - SRS 19, 52
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 285
Symbol Meaning Page
Low oil pres- sure
50, 52
Seatbelt reminder
16, 52
Alternator not charging
52
Fault in brake system
52, 157
Main beam indicator
49
Symbol Meaning Page
Left direction indicators
49
Right direc- tion indicators
49
Other information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol Meaning Page
Rain sensor* 65
Cruise control* 66
Gear shift indicator* -
Information symbols in the centre
console display
Symbol Meaning Page
G 02 12 16
Surround sound (only Premium Sound)
239
G 02 12 21
News 243
G 02 12 22
Programme types 243
G 02 12 23
Regional radio pro- grammes
244
Audio files 246
Directory in CD disc 246
G 02 12 20
Traffic information 243
Phone* 260
BluetoothTM hands- free*
260
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
11
286
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol Meaning Page
Seatbelt reminder 17
Airbag, passenger seat, activated
22, 23
Airbag, passenger seat, deactivated
23
11 Specifications
11
287
12 Alphabetical Index
12
288
A
A/C electronic climate control..................... 90
ABS fault............................................ 51, 157
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 58
Active headlamps...................................... 58
Additional heater (Diesel)........................... 95
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 179 halogen headlamp.............................. 179
AF automatic frequency update........... 244
Airbag........................................................ 20 activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22 driver's and front passenger side......... 21 key switch off........................................ 22
AIRBAG ..................................................... 20
Airbag system............................................ 20
Air conditioning ECC...................................................... 88 general.................................................. 86
Air distribution............................................ 91 ECC...................................................... 90
Air quality system, ECC............................. 89
Air vents..................................................... 87
Alarm........................................................ 134 alarm indicator.................................... 134 alarm signals....................................... 135 arming................................................. 134 automatic alarm activation................. 135 deactivating a triggered alarm............ 135 disarming............................................ 135 RDS traffic warning............................. 243 reduced alarm level............................ 135 testing the alarm system.................... 135
Alcolock................................................... 146
Antenna location, Keyless drive............... 128
Approach light, duration.................... 75, 120 setting................................................... 78
Audio, see also Sound............................. 236
Audio volume phone.......................................... 254, 262 phone/media player............................ 262 programme types............................... 245 ring signal, phone............................... 262
Auto climate control settings........................ 88
AUTO storing stations................................... 241
Auto climate............................................... 88
Automatic car washes............................. 198
Automatic gearbox manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 154 towing and recovery........................... 166 trailer........................................... 170, 171
Automatic locking.................................... 132
Automatic relocking................................. 131
Autostart.................................................. 150
Auto volume control................................ 239
Auxiliary heater.......................................... 95
Average fuel consumption......................... 62
B
Bass speaker........................................... 238
Battery............................................. 217, 281 changing the battery in the remote con- trol key................................................ 129 maintenance............................... 207, 217 overload.............................................. 141 specifications...................................... 281 start assistance................................... 169 symbols on the battery....................... 217 warning symbols................................. 217
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 163
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 76, 163
12 Alphabetical Index
12
289
Bluetooth handsfree............................................ 260 mute microphone............................... 261 transfer call to mobile......................... 261
Bluetooth media.................................................. 238 streaming audio.................................. 238
Boarding rear seat................................................ 99
Bonnet, opening...................................... 208
Boot lid driving with open boot lid................... 141 locking/unlocking........................ 120, 130
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 214
Brake light.................................................. 60
Brakes anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 157 brake light............................................. 60 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 158 emergency brake lights...................... 158 handbrake............................................. 70
Brake system........................................... 157
Bulb holder removal............................................... 222
Bulbs changing............................................. 219
Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 219, 281
C
Calls functions during a call................ 253, 256 incoming............................................. 261 operation..................................... 253, 261 volume in phone................................. 254
Car care................................................... 198
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 200
Cargo area............................................... 114 cargo separator.................................. 114 electrical socket.................................. 116 loading assistance.............................. 114 load retaining eyelets.......................... 115 ski hatch............................................. 116
Car settings............................................... 78
Car upholstery......................................... 200
Car wash.................................................. 198
Catalytic converter................................... 143 recovery.............................................. 166
CD discs storage compartment......................... 112
CD functions............................................ 246
Checking and topping up the coolant..... 213
Checking the engine oil level................... 210
Checks fluids and oils...................................... 210
Children..................................................... 33 child seats and side airbags................. 24 location in the car................................. 33 location in the car, table....................... 34 safety.................................................... 33
Child seat................................................... 33
Child seats................................................. 33 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 39 size classes for child seats with the ISO- FIX fixture system................................. 39
Cigarette lighter socket front seat............................................... 56
Cleaning automatic car washes......................... 198 car wash............................................. 198 rims..................................................... 198 seatbelts............................................. 201 upholstery........................................... 200
Climate control general.................................................. 86 personal preferences............................ 77
12 Alphabetical Index
12
290
Climate control settings auto....................................................... 88
Clock, adjustment...................................... 77
Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 214
Coat hanger............................................. 111
Cold start................................................. 156 automatic gearbox.............................. 156
Collision crash mode........................................... 32
Colour code, paint................................... 202
Combined instrument panel...................... 49
Compass................................................... 73 calibration............................................. 73 setting the zone.................................... 73
Condensation in headlamps.................... 198
Coolant.................................................... 213
Cooling system........................................ 140
Crash, see Collision................................... 32
Cruise control............................................ 66
D
Deadlock deactivation........................................ 132 temporary deactivation....................... 132
Deadlocks................................................ 132
Diesel....................................................... 144
Diesel: engine preheater............................ 51
Diesel particle filter.................................. 144
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 212
Direction indicators.................................... 61
Disc text................................................... 247
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 156
Display, messages..................................... 54
Display lighting.......................................... 58
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............ 235, 239
Door mirrors............................................... 75
Driver's door control panel.................. 48, 71
Driving cooling system.................................... 140 economical......................................... 140 in water............................................... 140 slippery driving conditions.................. 141 with trailer........................................... 170
Driving in water........................................ 140
Driving with a trailer towball load........................................ 271 towing capacity.................................. 271
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 159
DSTC, see also Stability system symbol.................................................. 51
During a call, functions............................ 256
E
Economical driving.................................. 140
ECO pressure.......................................... 186 table............................................ 186, 280
Electrical socket cargo area........................................... 116 centre console...................................... 56
Electrical system...................................... 281
Emergency calls...................................... 251
Emergency equipment warning triangle.................................. 187
Emergency puncture repair..................... 192
Emission control fault indicator........................................ 51
12 Alphabetical Index
12
291
Engine block heater fuel-driven............................................. 92
Engine compartment............................... 208 coolant................................................ 213 oil........................................................ 210 power steering fluid............................ 215
Engine oil......................................... 210, 274 adverse driving conditions.................. 274 capacities........................................... 274 filter..................................................... 210 oil grade.............................................. 274 oil pressure........................................... 52
Engine specifications............................... 273
Entry, keyless............................................. 78
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's manual....................................................... 13
EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 245
Equalizer.................................................. 239
Error messages........................................ 105
Error messages in BLIS........................... 164
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
External dimensions................................ 270
Extra mats................................................ 102
F
Fan ECC...................................................... 88
Fast-wind................................................. 247
First aid equipment.................................. 189
Floor mats................................................ 102
Fluids, capacities..................................... 276
Fluids and oils.................................. 210, 276
Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart- ment......................................................... 210
Fluids and oils general............................. 210
Fog lamps rear........................................................ 58
Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 58
Frequency update, automatic.................. 244
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 13
Fuel CO2 emissions.................................... 278 consumption....................................... 278 fuel consumption, display..................... 62 fuel economy...................................... 186 fuel filter.............................................. 144 level indicator........................................ 51
parking heater....................................... 92 refuelling............................................. 142
Fuses....................................................... 225 box in the engine compartment.......... 226 changing............................................. 225 general................................................ 225 relay/fuse box in the passenger com- partment............................................. 229
G
Gearbox manual................................................ 153
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 155
Geartronic................................................ 154
General information on fuel..................... 143
Glovebox................................................. 111 locking................................................ 122
Gross vehicle weight............................... 271
H
Handbrake................................................. 70
Hazard warning flashers............................ 69
12 Alphabetical Index
12
292
Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights (ABL) .............. 179
Headlamps................................................. 57
Heating front seats............................................. 90 rearview and door mirrors.................... 90 rear window.......................................... 90
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 64
HomeLink ................................................ 80
Home safe lighting............................... 61, 75 setting................................................... 78
I
IDIS Intelligent Driver Information Sys- tem........................................................... 251
Ignition keys............................................. 151
IMEI number............................................ 256
Immobiliser...................................... 120, 151
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 26
Information display.................................... 54
Information on fuel................................... 143
Infotainment system menus................................................. 234
Inlaid mats............................................... 102
Instrument lighting..................................... 58
Instrument overview left-hand drive....................................... 44 right-hand drive.................................... 46
Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 107
Interior rearview mirror............................... 73 automatic dimming............................... 73
Intermittent wiping..................................... 64
iPod , connection................................... 236
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 39
J
Jack......................................................... 187
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 271
Key keyless lock and ignition system........ 126 remote control key.............................. 120
Key blade......................................... 121, 127 active locks......................................... 123
Keyless drive............................ 126, 152, 283 starting the car.................................... 152
Keyless entry............................................. 78
Keyless start (keyless drive)..................... 126
Keypad in the steering wheel...... 66, 68, 252
Key positions........................................... 150
Kick-down automatic gearbox.............................. 155
L
Lambda-sond.......................................... 143
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 200
Lighting Active Xenon headlamps...................... 58 approach light, duration............... 75, 120 automatic lighting............................... 108 automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 57 bulbs, specifications........................... 281 dipped beam........................................ 57 display lighting...................................... 58 front fog lamps..................................... 58 headlamp levelling................................ 57 home safe lighting.......................... 61, 75 in passenger compartment................. 107
12 Alphabetical Index
12
293
lighting panel, passenger compart- ment...................................................... 57 main/dipped beam......................... 57, 61 position/parking lamps......................... 57 reading lamps..................................... 107 rear fog lamp........................................ 58
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 219 bulb holder, rear................................. 223 cargo area........................................... 223 dipped beam...................................... 220 direction indicators............................. 221 fog lamp.............................................. 222 front.................................................... 219 interior lighting, roof............................ 224 main beam.......................................... 220 number plate lighting.......................... 223 parking lamps..................................... 221 position lamps.................................... 221 side marker lamps.............................. 221 vanity mirror........................................ 224
Loading general................................................ 178 load capacity...................................... 178 load retaining eyelets.......................... 115 ski hatch............................................. 116
Load retaining eyelets.............................. 115
Locking.................................................... 127 unlocking............................................ 130
Locking/unlocking................................... 130 inside.................................................. 131 outside................................................ 130
Locks locking................................................ 130
Lubricants................................................ 276
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 276
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 57
Main beam flashing................................................. 61
Main beam "flash"..................................... 61
Maintenance............................................ 207 rustproofing........................................ 203 self-maintenance................................ 207
Making calls..................................... 253, 261
Manual gearbox....................................... 153 towing and recovery........................... 166
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 154
Max. roof load ......................................... 271
Memory function in seats.......................... 99
Menus audio system...................................... 234
Menu structure.......................................... 77 media player....................................... 249 phone, menu options.......................... 258 phone, overview................................. 257
Messages in BLIS.................................... 164
Messages in the information display......... 54
Meters in the combined instrument panel fuel gauge............................................. 49 outside temperature gauge.................. 49 speedometer......................................... 49 tachometer........................................... 49 trip meter.............................................. 49
Misting attending to the windows..................... 86 condensation in headlamps............... 198 removing with defroster function.......... 89 timer function........................................ 89
Mobile phone connect............................................... 262 handsfree............................................ 260 register phone..................................... 260
12 Alphabetical Index
12
294
N
News........................................................ 243
O
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 210, 274
Oil level low.............................................. 210
One-key dial............................................. 255
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 13
Oxyhydrogen gas.................................... 169
P
PACOS....................................................... 22
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Paintwork colour code......................................... 202 damage and touch-up........................ 202
Parking assistance................................... 161 parking assistance sensors................ 162
Parking brake....................................... 52, 70
Parking heater battery and fuel..................................... 92 general.................................................. 92 parking on a hill.................................... 92 symbols and display messages............ 93 time setting........................................... 94
Passenger compartment filter................... 86
Passenger compartment heater fuel-driven............................................. 92
Personal preferences................................. 77 approach light, duration....................... 78 auto blower adjust................................ 77 automatic locking................................. 78 doors unlock......................................... 78 home safe lighting................................ 78 keyless entry......................................... 78 lock confirm. light................................. 78 recirculation timer................................. 77 unlock confirm. light............................. 78
Petrol grade............................................. 143
Phone calling from the phone book............... 255 connect............................................... 262 controls............................................... 252 entering text........................................ 254 handsfree............................................ 260 incoming calls..................................... 261
making calls........................................ 261 on/off.................................................. 253 one-key dial........................................ 255 phone book......................................... 263 phone book, shortcut......................... 263 receiving a call.................................... 261 register phone..................................... 260 standby, standby mode...................... 253 traffic safety........................................ 252
Phone book handling numbers............................... 254
Phone system.......................................... 251
Polishing.................................................. 199
Power seat................................................. 98
Power steering fluid, checking and topping up............................................................. 215
Power windows......................................... 71 passenger seat..................................... 72
Privacy locking......................................... 124
Programme type...................................... 244
PTY Programme type........................... 244
Puncture, see Tyres......................... 187, 190
Putting calls on hold................................ 253
12 Alphabetical Index
12
295
R
Radio EON.................................................... 245 frequency update................................ 244 news................................................... 243 programme types............................... 242 radio settings...................................... 241 radio stations...................................... 241 REG.................................................... 244
Radio text................................................ 244
Rain sensor................................................ 65
Random, CD and audio files.................... 247
RDS functions.......................................... 242 resetting.............................................. 245
Reading lamps, see Lighting................... 107
Rear seat boarding............................................... 99
Rearview and door mirrors automatic retracting/extending...... 75, 78 compass............................................... 73 door...................................................... 75 electrically retractable........................... 75 interior................................................... 73
Recirculation ECC...................................................... 89
Recommended child seats ....................... 33
Reduced guard settings................................................. 78
Refrigerant................................................. 86
Refuelling fuel cap............................................... 142 fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 142 fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 142 refuelling............................................. 142
Refusing a call......................................... 253
REG - Regional radio programmes......... 244
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 225
Remote control........................................ 120 replacing the battery........................... 129
Remote control, HomeLink programmable ..................................... 80
Remote control key................................. 151 battery replacement............................ 129 detachable key blade......................... 121 functions............................................. 120
Remote control key system, type appro- val............................................................ 283
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 75
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 153
Rims cleaning.............................................. 198
Roll-over protection................................... 29
Roof error messages................................... 105 hatch cover......................................... 104 lowering.............................................. 103 opening and closing........................... 104
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 271
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) (Roll- over protection).......................................... 29
Rustproofing............................................ 203
S
Safety safety systems, table............................ 30
Scan CD and audio files.............................. 247 radio stations...................................... 242
Seatbelt pregnancy............................................. 17 seatbelt guide....................................... 18 seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
12 Alphabetical Index
12
296
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Seats manual setting...................................... 98 power seat............................................ 98
Service programme................................. 206
Side airbags............................................... 24
Side airbag SIPS........................................ 24
SIM card.................................................. 251
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
Ski hatch.................................................. 116
SMS......................................................... 256 read..................................................... 256 write.................................................... 256
Soot filter........................................... 54, 145
Soot filter full............................................ 145
Sound audio settings............................. 236, 238 audio source....................................... 236 volume................................................ 236
Spare wheel............................................. 187 temporary spare......................... 185, 187
Spin control............................................. 159
SRS system general.................................................. 20
Stability and traction control system....... 159
Stains....................................................... 200
Standby, phone....................................... 253
Start assistance....................................... 169
Starting the engine.................................. 150 keyless drive............................... 126, 152
Steering lock............................................ 150
Steering wheel cruise control........................................ 66 keypad.................................... 66, 68, 252 steering wheel adjustment.................... 69
Stone chips and scratches...................... 202
Storage compartment.............................. 110 CD discs............................................. 112
Storage spaces in the passenger compart- ment......................................................... 110
Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 241
Streaming audio...................................... 238
Subwoofer............................................... 238
Surround.......................................... 235, 239
Symbols................................................... 160 indicator symbols........................... 51, 52 warning symbols................................... 50
Symbols and display messages parking heater....................................... 93
T
Tank volume............................................ 276
Technical data, engine............................. 273
Temperature passenger compartment, electronic cli- mate control.......................................... 90
Testing the alarm system......................... 135
Timer ECC...................................................... 89
Tools........................................................ 187
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 172
Towing..................................................... 166 towing eye.......................................... 167
Towing capacity....................................... 271
Towing equipment................................... 172 installation........................................... 174 removing............................................. 176 specifications...................................... 173
Towing eye.............................................. 167
TP Traffic information............................ 243
12 Alphabetical Index
12
297
Traffic information.................................... 243
Trailer....................................................... 170 cable................................................... 172
Trip computer............................................ 62
Tuning Radio............................................ 241
Type approval, remote control key sys- tem........................................................... 283
Type designation..................................... 268
Tyres direction of rotation............................ 185 driving characteristics......................... 182 general................................................ 182 maintenance....................................... 182 pressure...................................... 186, 280 puncture repair................................... 192 specifications...................................... 182 speed ratings...................................... 182 tread wear indicators.......................... 183 winter tyres......................................... 185
U
Unlocking......................................... 127, 130 settings................................................. 78
USB, connection...................................... 236
V
Ventilation.................................................. 87
Vibration damper..................................... 172
Volume audio system...................................... 236 auto volume control............................ 239 media player....................................... 236
W
Warning lamp stability and traction control system. . 159
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19
Warning triangle....................................... 187
Washer fluid, filling................................... 213
Washers headlamps............................................ 64 washer fluid, filling.............................. 213 windscreen........................................... 64
Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 76
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 200
Waxing..................................................... 199
Weights kerb weight......................................... 271
Wheels changing............................................. 190 installation........................................... 191 removal............................................... 190 rims..................................................... 184 snow chains........................................ 184 spare wheel........................................ 187
Whiplash injury.......................................... 27
WHIPS child seat/booster cushion................... 27 whiplash injury...................................... 27
Wind deflector......................................... 106
Windscreen wipers.................................... 64 rain sensor............................................ 65
Winter tyres.............................................. 185
Wiper blades............................................ 216 cleaning.............................................. 216 replacing, windscreen......................... 216
Related manuals for Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2012
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the C70 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2012 on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo C70 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo C70. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2012 is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2012 consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2012 free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2012, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo C70 Owners Manual 2012 as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.